JP2018175229A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To improve amusement of games by giving a change in an action display, if a change in a display mode of a prescribed display is suggested by performing the action display to be acted on the prescribed display.SOLUTION: A success pattern and a failure pattern are provided. In the success pattern, when a color ball 931 thrown by a character 930 collides with a reservation display TH, the color ball 931 becomes broken and the color of the reservation display TH is upgraded. But in the failure pattern, the color ball 931 is not broken and the color of the reservation display TH is not changed. A change is given to the action display by performing a deceleration display in which the speed of the color ball 931 in the middle is decelerated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 15

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, and more particularly to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling it to an advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  Among the generally known game machines of this type, there are machines which perform variable display (variable display) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player.

  In such a gaming machine, it is displayed whether or not an arrow or a sword released against a predetermined display corresponding to the variable display is stuck in the predetermined display of the object, and the predetermined display is displayed according to the result. There have been some who give notice of the corresponding variable display (Patent Documents 1 and 2).

JP, 2015-173941, A JP, 2015-171589, A

  However, in this type of conventional gaming machine, since there is little change in the mode of production showing whether or not a released arrow or a sword is stuck in a predetermined display, they are directed to a predetermined display after the arrow or the sword is released. There has been a problem that the player's sense of expectation can not be effectively enhanced.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to change the display of action by indicating the change of the display mode of the predetermined display by performing the action display on the predetermined display. It is providing a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.) capable of performing variable display (variable display etc.) and controlling to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player,
Predetermined display means (hold display area 18c, active display area AHA, etc.) capable of displaying predetermined display (hold display, active display, etc.) corresponding to the variable display;
As shown in FIGS. 15 (a), (b) and (c), the character 930 sets the color ball 931 to the hold display TH as shown in FIGS. 15 (a), (b) and (c). Specific effect execution means (pending display area 18c, active display area AHA, etc.) capable of executing the color ball 931 colliding with the pending display TH and changing the color of the pending display TH etc.
Suggestion display execution means that can execute at least a suggestion that suggests an expectation that would be advantageous to the player by changing the display mode in a plurality of steps (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, meter MT Effect control CPU 90120 etc.) that can execute the display of
Change effect executing means capable of changing the change effect (meter effect) capable of changing the display mode of the indication display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, an operation image of the movable effect member 9060, an effect image such as an oval Effect that displays the effect of changing the display mode of the meter MT toward the upper limit of the meter (level 4 (MAX)) effect that changes the display mode of the meter toward the lower limit of the meter, type and number of items Effect control CPU that can execute effects such as changing effects, characters (size, color, number, etc.), effects that increase or decrease numbers, etc.
During the variable display, the special display (for example, normal reach production, reach development possibility production, etc. production that enjoys a sense of expectation for the gaming machine to be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player) Suggestion display control means capable of executing display control to be redisplayed according to the execution of the change presentation after being erased once at the start of the execution of the display (for example, as shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. 69) The effect control CPU 90120 is capable of executing effects such as redisplaying the meter MT etc. according to the fact that the movable effect member 9060 is operated to develop into a super reach at the start of the execution of the availability effect, etc. Etc) and,
The specific effect execution means is
The first pattern (the success pattern in FIGS. 15 (a), (b), (c), etc.) for starting the display of the action display and changing the display mode of the predetermined display after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the display of the action display A second pattern (such as a failure pattern in FIGS. 15 (a), (b) and (d)) that does not change the display mode of the predetermined display after a predetermined period has elapsed.
At a common timing in a predetermined period of the first pattern and the second pattern, the speed of the action display with respect to the target predetermined display is decelerated to be displayed (as shown in FIG. 15 (b, success and failure) It is possible to start the deceleration of the ball's speed at the same timing and so on.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the action display. In addition, in the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress the suggestion display from disturbing the special effect.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1),
Holding storage means (such as (A) and (B) in FIG. 8) for storing information on variable display as holding storage information;
Hold display means (hold display area 18c etc.) capable of displaying the hold storage information stored by the hold storage means as a hold display;
And a moving unit (S56 in FIG. 12, etc.) capable of moving the hold display each time the variable display is started,
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect at a timing that does not overlap with the timing of moving the hold display (as shown in FIG. 15, in the case of the shift of the hold display, the effect of throwing the ball and causing a collision) etc).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being wasted by the pending display of the target of the specific effect being moved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The expectation for the first pattern is different depending on the length of the period (deceleration period) in which the action display is decelerated and displayed (the expectation for the success pattern is 3 seconds for the deceleration period as shown in FIG. 18). It depends on how long it takes 5 seconds, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the length of the deceleration period.
(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
The first pattern is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the second pattern (as shown in FIG. 17, the success pattern is controlled to be a big hit than the failure pattern) Is high, etc.),
The information processing apparatus further comprises notifying means capable of notifying that the first pattern is to be provided (as shown in FIG. 15, the push button 120 vibrates before becoming a success pattern, etc.);
The notification means can notify that the first pattern is to be provided while the deceleration and display is being performed (the push button 120 vibrates when the speed of the ball 931 is in the deceleration period, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, since it becomes possible to detect in advance that the first pattern is to be made, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
The specific effect execution means can display the action display at any one of a plurality of types of speeds before the action display is decelerated and displayed (deceleration display) (the character 930 is a force Because there are cases in which the ball is thrown with putting in and the ball is thrown without putting in force, there are multiple speeds until the speed of the thrown ball enters the deceleration period, etc.),
Depending on the speed of the action display, the ratio of the first pattern or the second pattern after decelerating display of the action display is different (the speed at which the initial speed of the ball thrown by the character 930 is higher is slower). More likely to become the first pattern than

  According to such a configuration, the player's attention can be drawn to the speed of the action display at a stage before the action display is decelerated and started to be displayed.

(6) In the gaming machine of (5),
The speed of the action display during the deceleration display is constant regardless of the speed of the action display before the deceleration display of the action display (the ball speed during the deceleration display is the initial speed of the ball thrown by the character 930). Regardless of the difference, etc.)

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the deceleration display from becoming complicated.
(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6),
The specific effect execution means may execute the deceleration display or may not execute the deceleration display (the velocity of the ball thrown by the character 930 is maintained without performing the deceleration display and the target Make a pending display collide, etc.),
The degree of expectation controlled by the first pattern is higher when the deceleration display is performed than when the deceleration display is not performed (when the deceleration display is performed rather than when the deceleration display is not performed) , Increase the degree of expectation that will be a success pattern, etc.

  According to such a configuration, the player's attention can be drawn to the presence or absence of the execution of the deceleration display.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7),
The specific effect execution means is
As the specific effect, a suggestion display (such as the suggestion display 910) that suggests that the display mode of the predetermined display changes is displayed, and a specific display (such as a timer display 920) that can specify the execution period of the specific effect is displayed. And
The display mode of the predetermined display is related to the specific effect based on the fact that the specific display has become the specific mode (as shown in FIG. 30 (e), the timer display 920 has become 0 seconds, etc.) (As shown in FIG. 30F, the display mode of the active display AH is changed in a mode related to the color of the ball image 911 changed by the specific effect, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by clarifying the timing at which the predetermined display changes.

(9) In the gaming machine of (8),
A plurality of display modes of the specific display are provided (as shown in FIG. 33, a plurality of specific effect execution times are provided, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, the effects by the specific display become diverse, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(10) The gaming machine according to (9) above,
Depending on the display mode of the specific display, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is different (as shown in FIG. 33, the specific effect execution time determined in the big hit and the off time is different, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which display mode is displayed.

(11) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (8) to (10),
The specific effect execution means changes the display mode of the suggestion display during the execution of the specific effect (as shown in FIGS. 30B and 30C, the color of the ball image 911 in the suggestion display 910 is specified effect Etc. during the execution of

According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of the suggestion display.
(12) The gaming machine according to (11) above,
A plurality of timings at which the display mode of the indication display changes (eg, a plurality of change timings are provided as shown in FIG. 36).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to at which timing the suggested display changes.

(13) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (8) to (12),
The apparatus further comprises a variation handling display means (such as an active display area AHA) capable of performing a variation handling display (such as an active display AH) displayed as the predetermined display corresponding to the variation display during the variation display.
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect on the variation-responsive display (such as changing the display mode of the active display AH as shown in (e) and (f) of FIG. 30).

  According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by clarifying the timing at which the change response display changes.

(14) The gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (13),
It further comprises reach effect execution means (microcomputer 100 for effect control etc.) for executing predetermined reach effect (SP reach etc. in FIG. 31),
The specific effect executing means executes the specific effect before the predetermined reach effect is performed (as shown in FIG. 31, for example, the specific effect is performed before the SP reach is performed).

  According to such a configuration, the player can be made to pay attention to the specific effect, and the player can be made to pay attention to the predetermined reach effect.

(15) The gaming machine according to (13) above,
Change effect executing means (microcomputer 100 for effect control, etc.) capable of executing change effects (such as active change effects) for changing the display mode of the variation-responsive display at different rates depending on whether or not controlled to the advantageous state Further)),
The timing of the change effect is a first timing (such as a period during SP reach) during execution of a special effect (SP reach effect, etc.) indicating whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state, and the first timing There is a different second timing (a period before SP reach, etc.), and the execution period of the change effect is different between the first timing and the second timing (as shown in the modification, active change before SP reach) The production period differs between the production and the active change production during the SP reach, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effects of the special effects from being impaired and to improve the interest of the game.

  Moreover, the form for implementing invention mentioned later includes the invention which concerns on the following (16)-(22). Furthermore, some conventional gaming machines are capable of performing variable display. As shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015- 093047 (paragraphs 0212 to 0259, FIGS. 18 to 23), in such a game machine, the display mode changes in a plurality of steps as meter display. In some cases, it is possible to execute a suggestion display that suggests an expectation that would be advantageous to the player, and to change the display mode of the suggestion display after displaying an effect image or the like. However, in such a gaming machine, since the suggestion display is always displayed, for example, when the special effect such as the reach effect is performed, the suggestion display may be in the way of the special effect. In view of this point, there is a demand for a game machine which can suppress the suggestion display from disturbing the special effect.

(16) A game machine for achieving the above object is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 etc.),
Suggestion display execution means that can execute at least a suggestion that suggests an expectation that would be advantageous to the player by changing the display mode in a plurality of steps (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, meter MT Effect control CPU 90120 etc.) that can execute the display of
Change effect executing means capable of changing the change effect (meter effect) capable of changing the display mode of the indication display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, an operation image of the movable effect member 9060, an effect image such as an oval Effect that displays the effect of changing the display mode of the meter MT toward the upper limit of the meter (level 4 (MAX)) effect that changes the display mode of the meter toward the lower limit of the meter, type and number of items Effect control CPU that can execute effects such as changing effects, characters (size, color, number, etc.), effects that increase or decrease numbers, etc.
During the variable display, the special display (for example, normal reach production, reach development possibility production, etc. production that enjoys a sense of expectation for the gaming machine to be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player) Suggestion display control means capable of executing display control to be redisplayed according to the execution of the change presentation after being erased once at the start of the execution of the display (for example, as shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. 69) The effect control CPU 90120 is capable of executing effects such as redisplaying the meter MT etc. according to the fact that the movable effect member 9060 is operated to develop into a super reach at the start of the execution of the availability effect, etc. And the like).

  According to such a configuration, in the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress the suggestion display from disturbing the special effect.

(17) The gaming machine according to (16) above,
A predetermined display means (for example, a CPU 90120 for effect control capable of executing the chance character image 9055 as shown in FIG. 67) capable of executing a predetermined display (for example, a display of the chance character image 9055) during execution of the special effect In addition,
The predetermined display means executes the predetermined display in a display area at least a part of which overlaps the display area in which the indication display is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 67, the display area of the meter MT and the chance character image 9055 overlap with at least a part of the display area, and the like).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the reduction in visibility due to overlapping of the suggestion display and the predetermined display during execution of the special effect.

(18) In the gaming machine of (16) or (17),
The redisplay of the suggestion display once erased is executed when the change presentation is performed during the execution of the special presentation (for example, S90707, S90708 in FIG. 63, FIG. 63, etc.). ).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the control relating to the suggestion display and to improve the interest of the game.

(19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (16) to (18),
The indication display control means can execute display control to continue the deletion state of the indication display that has been deleted once when the execution of the special effect is started (for example, the deletion state of the meter MT is continued) Display control etc. of the first modification).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the control relating to the suggestion display and to improve the interest of the game.

(20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (16) to (19),
The indication display control means temporarily erases the indication when the display mode of the indication when the execution of the special effect is started is the first display mode, and the execution of the special effect is started. The indication indication is not erased once when the indication aspect of the indication indication of the occasion is the second indication aspect (for example, when the indication value of the meter MT is less than a predetermined value at the start of the reach development possibility effect indication) Is temporarily erased, and when the display value of the meter MT is equal to or more than a predetermined value, the display control of the second modification and the like in which the meter MT is not erased once)).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the control relating to the suggestion display and to improve the interest of the game.

(21) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (16) to (20),
Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 61, a CPU for effect control 90120 etc. capable of executing advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode),
A mode when the change effect execution means changes the display mode of the suggestion display in the change effect in the case where the specific effect is performed and the case where the specific effect is not performed before the change effect is performed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 61, super reach is not performed when the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is performed before the meter effect in the super reach effect is performed. The amount of change of the meter when changing the display mode of the meter MT in the meter effect in the effect, or changing the amount of oval displayed as a predetermined effect, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the change effect that can change the display mode of the suggestion display.

(22) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (16) to (21),
Adjustment image display means capable of displaying an adjustment image for adjusting a rendering effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 66, when the volume is adjusted, an adjustment result image indicating the adjustment result of the volume is displayed on the image display device The control image display unit further includes an effect control CPU 90120 and the like displayed in a mode superimposed on the effect image and the demo image in the predetermined area of 905, and the adjustment image display unit performs the adjustment in response to the display result of the variable display being derived. Make the image invisible or difficult to recognize (for example, as shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, deleting the adjustment result image R in the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the display result of the variable display which is derived and displayed.

  The present invention may have only the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has the configuration other than the invention specific matters together with the invention specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure showing a hit classification table. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of a main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table and a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the change pattern table used in order to determine a change pattern in a tabular form. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a reservation storage buffer in a microcomputer for game control. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a figure which shows pending change production. It is a figure which shows a pending | holding change presentation execution determination table. It is a figure which shows a pending | holding change aspect determination table. It is a figure which shows the deceleration period determination table. It is a figure which shows a presentation execution timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows pre-reading advance notice processing. It is a flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is a figure which shows an active pending change presentation. It is a figure which shows an active pending change production | presentation execution determination table. It is a figure which shows an active pending final color determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during production design variation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the start position of an effect, a success rate, and a change rate. It is a flow chart which shows operation production processing. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification (one-shot notification) of active pending change presentation. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification (timer change presentation) of active pending change presentation. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution period of timer change production. It is a figure which shows a timer change presentation execution determination table. It is a figure which shows a timer change production execution time determination table. It is a figure which shows the change frequency determination table for timer change presentation. It is a figure which shows the change pattern determination table for timer change presentation. It is a figure which shows the change timing determination table for timer change presentation. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process for timer change production. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a special figure display result etc. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a fluctuation pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart etc. which show an example of a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special aspect super reach production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of meter production determination processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a MAX timing decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a structure of a high-speed fluctuation inside reaching level determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a structure of the meter production | presentation determination table used as a gusset. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a final attainment level determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a structure of a high-speed fluctuation inside reaching level determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of advance production determination processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a notice production determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a preliminary production effect execution period decision table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a lighting production determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reach production operation control processing. It is an explanatory view showing an example of execution timings, such as meter production. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation screen at the time of performing meter production | presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation screen at the time of performing meter production | presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the production | presentation screen at the time of performing meter production | presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of the display screen at the time of displaying an adjustment result image etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the relationship of the display period of an adjustment result image, and the derivation | leading-out display period of a variable display result. It is a figure which shows the example of the display screen at the time of displaying an adjustment result image. It is a figure which shows the production | presentation screen of a redisplay production after a meter is once erased. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the execution timing which shows execution timings, such as meter production etc., when re-display production is performed after a meter is once erased. It is a flow chart which shows redisplay production processing after a meter is once erased.

  Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be other gaming machines such as a coin gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. As long as it is a machine, it may be any game machine.

  Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a hit classification table.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine in which a game is performed by striking a gaming ball as a gaming medium into the gaming area 7. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play space is a front frame (not shown) installed openably and closably with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism board (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (games described later And the board 6). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game is performed by driving a game ball as a game medium into the game area.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for emitting a bat, and the like. In addition, the game board 6 is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes it and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 where the driven game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball tray (lower plate) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is attached a stick controller 122 which can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). In the stick controller 122, a predetermined operation finger (for example, a forefinger or the like) is pressed and pulled in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 122 with the operation hand (for example, left hand or the like). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) that can perform an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 121 (FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation by pushing or pulling the trigger button 125 See) is built-in. In addition, a tilting direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation on the operating rod is provided in the inside of the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 122 or the like. In addition, the stick controller 122 incorporates a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  On the member forming the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation by the player or the like. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the operation performed by the player on the push button 120 may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 120 or the like. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in the upper and lower positional relationship in the central portion of the upper and lower dishes. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be shifted to either the left or the right in the upper and lower plates while maintaining the upper and lower positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical positional relationship, but may be in the horizontal positional relationship, for example. As the operation means, a lever switch and other operation means such as a jog dial may be provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as "variable display") effect symbols as plural types of identification information capable of identifying each of them is provided. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, a first special symbol display 8a that variably displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, and a plurality of types that can identify each And a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information of the second symbol.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is configured by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is configured of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and provided on the display screen is a effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Be In the effect symbol display area, symbol display areas are formed in which, for example, three effect symbols for decoration (for effect) on the left, middle and right are variably displayed.

  Each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is controlled by the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31 (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by the first special symbol display 8a, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the fluctuation display, and the second special symbol display 8b is performed by the first special symbol display 8a. (2) When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  When the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, or the big hit display result (big hit symbol) as the specific display result on the second special symbol display 8b When it is derived and displayed, the jackpot display result (combination of big hit symbols) as the specific display result is also derived and displayed on the effect display device 9. As described above, when the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is controlled to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) as the advantageous state in which the player is given an advantageous value (favorable value).

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol to be the final stop symbol (for example, middle symbol among left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stop, swing, zoom in / out or deform in the state that matches the combination of symbols, or display multiple symbols in synchronization with the same symbol, or change the position of the display symbol The effect performed in a state where the possibility of the occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are called "reach states") is called reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect design stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 9 constitutes a part of the big hit combination, the fluctuation display of the effect design which is not yet stopped is continued. The display state or the display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are variably displayed synchronously while constituting all or part of the big hit combination. In other words, reach refers to a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in a variable display mode. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state in which the same symbol stops in the left and right symbol display areas, and the symbol does not stop in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called "reach forming symbols" or "reach symbols".

  And the display production in the reach state is reach production display (reach production). In addition, at the time of reach, there are times when the effect which is different from usual is done with the lamp and the sound. This effect is called reach effect. In addition, when reaching, a character (effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a symbol (effect symbol etc)) is displayed, or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of a background image of the effect display device 9 ) May be changed. This change in the display of the character and the display mode of the background is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach are set so that a big hit is more likely to occur when they appear, as compared to the normal reach. Such special reach is called "super reach".

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information capable of identifying each is provided. The first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small-sized display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numerals 0-9. In addition, the second special symbol display (the second special symbol display (second) to the right of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), the second special symbol as identification information that can identify each Variation display unit 8b is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small-sized display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numerals 0-9.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol", and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be referred to as "special symbol indicator (variation indicator Sometimes referred to as ")".

  Although this embodiment shows the case where the two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may have only one special symbol display.

  The 1st start condition or the 2nd start condition which is the execution condition of the change display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the 1st start winning opening 13 or the 2nd start winning opening) of the fluctuation display of the 1st special symbol or the 2nd special symbol After having passed 14 (including winnings), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and it is started based on the state in which the big hit game is not executed) being established, and when the fluctuation display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The game ball passing means that the game ball has passed through an area defined as a winning area such as a winning opening or a gate in advance, and includes the concept that the gaming ball has entered the winning opening (winning). It is. Furthermore, deriving and displaying a display result means to stop and display a symbol (example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first start winning opening (first starting opening) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball can be won in the second start winning hole 14 (it becomes easy to get a start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the second starting winning hole 14 than the first starting winning hole 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second start winning hole 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball is more likely to win the first starting winning hole 13 than the second starting winning hole 14. In the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win, it may be configured to be able to win (that is, the gaming ball is hard to win). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as "starting winning opening" or "starting opening".

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the second reserve memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol suspension storage indicator 18b, the number of activated winning balls entering the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first suspension storage number (pending storage is also referred to as start storage or start prize storage). A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators for displaying) is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

  In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. If the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, it is possible to start the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is ended, the first The start condition of 1 is satisfied), the fluctuation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display 8a, and the fluctuation display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first number of pending storages is increased by 1 on the condition that the number of first pending storages has not reached the upper limit value.

  If the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, it is possible to start the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, the second The start condition of 2) is satisfied, and the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started in the second special symbol display 8 b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the effect display device 9. That is, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second pending storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Perform variable display of the effect pattern as the symbol of. The variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. In addition, the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8 b and the variation display of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 are synchronized with each other. In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a rendering symbol that evokes a big hit in the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  In addition, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) displaying the total number of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number (total hold memory number) at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9 , Hold display area) is provided. In the hold display area, a hold memory number can be specified as a hold memory display, for example, a hold memory image that can be specified by the display number of a predetermined image (by displaying one hold memory image corresponding to each hold memory information Specify the number) is displayed. As described above, by providing the hold display area for displaying the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of formation of execution conditions for which the variable display start condition is not satisfied. In each of the first special symbol holding storage indicator 18a, the second special symbol holding storage indicator 18b, and the effect display device 9, the light emission display and the image display for indicating the number of holding storages are "pending display", or , Called "pending storage display".

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the jackpot gaming state, the special variable winning ball device 20 is repeatedly and continuously controlled to repeat the open state and the closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state in which the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeat continuation control is also referred to as round control. In this embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and when it is determined to be a jackpot, any jackpot type is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol capable of identifying each of the effect display devices 9 is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of fluctuating display of the numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display the numbers 0 to 9 (or symbols). Moreover, the small display is formed, for example, in a square shape.

  When the game ball passes the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous for the player for a predetermined number of times. Changes to a player's open position. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls having passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time the game ball passes to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 increases the number of lighted LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. In the upper left and right upper and lower left of the game area 7, four speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a "card unit") that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  In the hit type table in FIG. 2, for each hit type in the big hit, the big hit probability after the end of the big hit gaming state, the base after the end of the big hit gaming state, the fluctuation time after the big hit gaming state end, the number of times open in big hit ( The number of rounds) and the open time of each round are shown.

  Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is put into the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds in the open state) has elapsed, or, In response to the establishment of the open end condition that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are generated, the closed state is established. Then, when the open end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round) where the predetermined upper limit is reached.

  Of the "big hit", after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, there is a high probability of being determined to be a big hit as a special gaming state as compared to the normal state (a normal gaming state which is not a definite change state) The type (classification) of the jackpot that shifts to (abbreviation of probability fluctuation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability variation jackpot”. Further, in this embodiment, when the special gaming state is controlled to be in a time-shortened state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the rendering symbol is shortened as compared with the non-time-shortening state accompanying the probability change state. There is. Note that the special game state may be controlled to be in the time saving state independently of the probability change state.

  In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the rendering symbol is shortened, so when it becomes the time saving state, the effective start winning is likely to occur and the big hit game may be performed. Increase. In addition, the type (class) of the big hit which does not shift to a definite change state after being controlled by the big hit game state of 15 rounds among "big hit" is called "usually big hit".

  Also, as the special gaming state, accompanying the probability changing state or the time saving state, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased by increasing the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. There is a case where it is controlled to the electronic control unit control state that facilitates (higher approach, higher frequency) winning on the variable winning ball device 15. Since the electronic control support state is a high base state as described later, it will be mainly referred to as a "high base state" in the following description.

  Here, the electronic Chu support control will be described. As the electric chew support control, the control (normal symbol shortening control) to reduce the fluctuation time of normal symbol (time from the start of fluctuation display to the derivation display of display result) and derive the display result early (normal symbol shortening control), ordinary symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will hit the symbol (normal symbol probability change control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened Control (control to increase the number of times of release) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the frequency of winning to the second start winning opening 14 As a result, the game ball is more likely to get a start winning (the condition for executing variable display on the special symbol displays 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is more likely to be established). As a result of this control, the frequency of winning on the second start winning opening 14 is increased, so that the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of variation display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 14 is increased by the electric chew support control is the ratio of the number of gaming balls paid out as the winning balls according to the winning to the number of firing balls The "base" is referred to as the "high base state" because it is in a higher state than when the control is not performed. Also, when such control is not performed, it is called "low base state". Further, such control is control for facilitating winning on the variable winning ball device 15 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball device 15, ie, the electric tulip, and is called "electric chew support control".

  In this embodiment, the term "high probability state (probability state)" and "low probability state (non-probability state)" are used as terms indicating the state of the big hit probability, and terms as a combination of base states are indicated. , "High base state (power chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-power chew support control state)" are used.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the terms “low probability low base state”, “low probability high base state”, and “high probability high base state” are used as terms indicating the combination of the jackpot probability state and the base state. Use. The "low probability low base state" is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a low probability state and the base state is a low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a low probability state and the base state is a high base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the jackpot probability is a high probability state and the base state is a high base state.

  As shown in FIG. 2, as the jackpots of 15 rounds, a plurality of kinds of jackpots, usually a jackpot and a definite variation jackpot, are provided. Usually, the big hit is a big hit controlled to the non-probability state, the short time state, and the high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 round big hit gaming state. In the normal big hit, the condition that the non-probability state continues until the next big hit occurs, and the time saving state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times of the variable display 100 times, and the next big hit And the condition until the condition occurs, whichever is earlier, until the condition is satisfied. The normal jackpot may be controlled to be a jackpot controlled to the non-probability state, the non-time-short state, and the power-less support control state (low probability low base state).

  The probability variation big hit is a jackpot in which control to shift to a probability variation status, a short time status, and a high base status (high probability high base status) is performed after the end of the 15 rounds of jackpot gaming status. In the big change big hit, the condition that the high probability high base state of this kind, until the variable indication is executed predetermined number of times a predetermined number of times or the condition that until the next big hit occurs, the earlier condition is satisfied Continue for a period of time.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board 31 (game control board) and the effect control board 80. As shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37 and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control), a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit Including 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by a hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created in a power source substrate (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the power supply of the backup power supply becomes impossible). In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state (i.e., the special symbol process flag etc.) according to the control state of the gaming control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs) the following. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit according to the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and occurs at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read out is a random number value based on the fact that the start winning is when the numerical data is read out (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. In addition, the solenoid 16 which opens and closes the variable winning prize ball device 15, and the output circuit 59 which drives the solenoid 21 which opens and closes the special variable winning prize ball device 20 which forms the big prize mouth in accordance with the command from the game control microcomputer 560 It is mounted on the substrate 31.

  In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control, the first special symbol indicator 8a which fluctuates and displays the special symbol, the second special symbol indicator 8b, the normal symbol indicator 10 which fluctuates and displays the ordinary symbol, the first special symbol hold memory The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b and the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 has the effect control microcomputer 100, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the VDP 109, the I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control of the effect display device 9.

  The effect control command for instructing effect content from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay substrate 77 which allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80 from the main substrate 31. Are received, and variable display control of the effect display device 9 is performed, and display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side is performed via the lamp driver substrate 35, or from the speaker 27 via the audio output substrate 70. Perform various kinds of effect control such as controlling the sound output of

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the trigger sensor 121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 105. Enter through. The effect control CPU 101 also receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 105. Do. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 receives an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation with respect to the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 and an input of the I / O port unit 105. Enter via port. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the stick controller 122 to vibrate by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 105.

  In addition to the program for effect control, various data tables used for controlling the effect operation and the like are stored in the ROM 102 mounted on the effect control board 80. For example, in the ROM 102, a plurality of determination tables prepared to make various determinations, determinations and settings by the effect control CPU 101, table data forming the determination tables, pattern data forming the various effect control patterns, etc. It is memorized. The effect control pattern is, for example, process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, etc. It consists of The RAM 103 mounted on the effect control board 80 stores various data used to control the effect operation.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing each random number. In FIG. 4, the type of random number, the update range, the application, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not to make a big hit. The random R is updated one by one at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated from 0 again. (2) Random 1 (MR1): Determine the type of big hit (type, normal big hit, and any kind of probability variation big hit) and the big hit symbol (for big hit type determination, for big hit symbol determination). (3) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 4 (MR 4): It is determined whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5 (MR 5): The initial value of random 4 is determined (for random 4 initial value determination).

  In this embodiment, as a big hit that is a specific gaming state, a plurality of types, usually a big hit and a probability variation big hit, are included. Therefore, when it is determined to be a big hit based on the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), the type of the big hit is any of these big hits based on the value of the big hit type determination random number (random 1). It is decided on the type. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) at the same time. Therefore, random 1 is also a jackpot symbol determination random number.

  In addition, first, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and the variation pattern is included in the determined variation pattern type using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) Determine the fluctuation pattern of As such, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is one in which a plurality of variation patterns are grouped according to the feature of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The variation pattern type may be called a variation type.

  In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns are classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type which is a fluctuation pattern type without a reach and a reach fluctuation pattern type which is a fluctuation pattern type with a reach.

  Such a variation pattern type is set to be different because the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the time non-saving state, when the display result is a loss. , The fluctuation time is shortened compared to when not in the time saving state. For example, in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the time shortening, in order to shorten the average time of fluctuation time as compared with the time not being time saving state. The rate at which the variation pattern type with a short time is selected increases, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the variation pattern of normal reach with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing this, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when not in the short time state.

  In addition, such fluctuation pattern classification is set by the fact that the selection ratio differs when the number of pending storages of each special symbol which fluctuates indicates more than predetermined number and when it is less than predetermined number, When the number of pending storages of each special symbol to display variable is more than a predetermined number, compared to the case where the number of pending storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number, the control for reducing the number of holdings is performed. You may do it. For example, in the pending number reduction control state, the rate at which the variation pattern type having a short variation display time such as the normal variation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the non-pending number reduction control state. The average time of the variable display time may be shorter than in the non-holding number reduction control state. Further, in the pending number reduction control, the variation display time itself of the variation pattern type may be shortened even when the same variation pattern type is selected, as compared with the case where the pending number reduction control state is not set.

  The variation pattern is not a two-step determination method of determining the variation pattern after determining the variation pattern type, but may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table and the big hit type determination table. FIG. 5A is an explanatory view showing the big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state which is not a definite change state, that is, a non-probability change state).

  Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 5 (A) is set as a big hit judgment value in the normal time jackpot determination table, and it is described in the right column of FIG. 5 (A) in the probability variation big hit judgment table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The big hit judgment value set in the big change judgment big hit judgment table is changed to the big hit judgment value (usually called the big hit judgment value or the 1st big hit judgment value) common to the big hit judgment value set in the normal time big hit judgment table Due to the addition of the unique big hit judgment value, a large number (10 times the number) of big hit judgment values (referred to as a positive change time jackpot judgment value or a second big hit judgment value) greater than the probability change time big hit judgment table is set. . As a result, in the probability change state, it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random R), but the big hit determination random number value is as shown in FIG. If it matches with any of the shown big hit judgment values, it is decided to make it a big hit (usually a big hit or a probability variation big hit) for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 5A indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit.

  FIGS. 5B and 5C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. FIG. 5 (B) is a case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage (also referred to as the first suspension storage) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (variation display of the first special symbol is Is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) to be used). FIG. 5C shows the case where the jackpot type is determined using the suspension storage (also referred to as a second suspension storage) based on the game ball winning in the second start winning opening 14 (variation display of the second special symbol is Is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used when it is performed).

  For each of the first and second special symbol big hit classification determination tables of FIG. 5 (B) and FIG. 5 (C), when it is determined that the variation display result is a big hit design, for the big hit classification determination Based on the random number (Random 1), the type of the big hit is determined to be either "normal big hit" or "probably big hit" and is referred to determine the big hit symbol.

  The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5B is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, and is a judgment value corresponding to each of “normal big hit” and “probable variation big hit” (big hit type determination Value) is set. The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 5C is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1, and is a judgment value corresponding to each of “normal big hit” and “probable variation big hit” (big hit type determination Value) is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5B and 5C, the big hit classification determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit design determination value) for determining the big hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to "normally big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probable variation big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Using the jackpot classification determination table, the CPU 56 determines the classification corresponding to the jackpot classification judgment value in which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot classification, and determines the jackpot design in which the value of random 1 matches as the jackpot design Do. Thereby, the big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit type are determined at the same time.

  The first special symbol big hit classification determination table in FIG. 5B and the second special symbol big hit classification determination table in FIG. 5C have the same proportion determined as the probability variation big hit. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the big hit classification determination table by the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, when selecting a big hit type from among a plurality of big hit types with different maximum round numbers in the big hit gaming state as a big hit type, the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. The ratio in which the jackpot type having a large number of rounds is selected may be set to be higher than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in the high base state, the type selection of the big hit becomes advantageous to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Also, the second special symbol big hit classification determination table of FIG. 5 (C) may have a higher probability of being determined as a probability variation big hit than the first special symbol big hit classification determination table of FIG. 5 (B) . By doing so, the variation display of the second special symbol can increase the ratio of the probability variation big hit as compared to the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the ratio of the first special symbol jackpot classification determination table to be determined as the probability variation jackpot may be higher than that of the second special symbol jackpot classification determination table.

  Next, a variation pattern table used to select and determine variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols in the game control microcomputer 560 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a table showing the variation pattern table used to determine the variation pattern.

  In FIG. 6, (a) shows a judgment table at the time of normal state deviation, and (b) shows a judgment table at the time of short time state. Also, (c) is a normal big hit time determination table, and (d) is a probability variable big hit time determination table. Each determination table of FIGS. 6A to 6D is stored in the ROM 54, is selected according to the game state, and is used to determine (determine) the fluctuation pattern type and the fluctuation pattern.

  The determination table shown in FIG. 6 includes a variation pattern type determination table indicating the relationship between random 2 and variation pattern types, and a variation pattern determination table indicating the relationship between random 3 and variation patterns belonging to each type for each variation pattern type. Including.

  In the column of “variation pattern type” or “variation pattern” in each table of FIG. 6, “normal” or “normal variation” indicates a normal variation pattern that is not a reach.

  Also, “normal reach” in each table in FIG. 6 indicates a variation pattern of normal reach that does not execute particularly flashy effects when reaching the reach state. "Super reach" indicates a variation pattern for performing reach effect for displaying a special effect image when reaching the reach state.

  Further, as described above, “super reach” is a variation pattern in which the proportion to be selected as a big hit is high compared to “normal reach” and the reliability as a big hit is high. Furthermore, “super reach” is a change pattern in which the change time is longer (for example, normal reach 10 seconds, super reach 50 seconds to 80 seconds) compared to “normal reach”. In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set in the super reach, and the big hit expectation degree (big hit is achieved because the first super reach <second super reach <third super reach <fourth super reach). Indicates that the possibility is high.

  "Expected degree" is a concept including an expected degree for a big hit, an expected degree for a definite change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation for the big hit (also referred to as the degree of reliability) is the degree of expectation for the big hit (proportion of becoming the big hit) when each reach variation pattern is selected, and for example, the reach variation is performed 100 times If the jackpot hits 60 times, the expectation for the jackpot becomes 60% (the appearance rate (probability) that the jackpot appears 60%). Further, the degree of expectation for the probability change means the degree of expectation (probability change ratio) to shift to the probability change state.

  In pachinko gaming machine 1, from the start of the variable display of each of the effect pattern as identification information and the first and second special symbols until the display result is derived and displayed, predetermined effect in effect display device 9 There may be a case where an effect called “pseudo series” (hereinafter referred to as “simulated series effect”) as an aspect is performed. A pseudo ream is an effect display that shows what is originally a single change corresponding to one hold storage as if a plurality of changes corresponding to a plurality of hold storage are being performed continuously. It is an abbreviation showing continuous fluctuation.

  In addition, within the fluctuation time which was decided vis-a-vis the 1 start winning a prize, in order to make it appear as if the variable indication (variable display) of the plural times of the symbol was executed vis-a-vis the starting winning a prize with 1 It refers to a special variation pattern (also referred to as "variation display pattern") in which temporary stop and re-variation are performed (repeated) a predetermined number of times for all symbol rows (left, middle, right). For example, the larger the number of repetitions of re-variation (the number of total variations including the first variation and the subsequent re-variation, and also referred to as the pseudo-series variation number), the more likely it will be the jackpot reliability (big jackpot) The degree of the proportion selected when the big hit is made with respect to all the selected proportions including the time, the degree of the big hit proportion, that is, the degree of the reliability that becomes the big hit becomes high. More specifically, by increasing the ratio selected when determined to be a big hit, it is suggested by a pseudo-series effect whether it will be a big hit gaming state. In the fluctuation pattern of the pseudo ream, the pseudo reaming symbol (for example, a symbol (a numeral or the like with a predetermined character or character is not included) is not included in the rendition design that is normally fluctuated (basically fluctuated) in the effect display device 9 Symbols not attached are also referred to as "semi-continuous dedicated symbols")) temporarily stop. In addition, in pseudo ream, the production | presentation symbol (number symbol in this embodiment) which carries out fluctuation display (variation display fundamentally) normally may be temporarily stopped. The combination of symbols temporarily stopped in the effect display device 9 is called a combination of temporary stop symbols. The combination of the temporary stop symbols is any of a plurality of false chances from among a plurality of chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as "simulated twin eyes (simulated twin chance eyes)" consisting of a combination of symbols other than the combination of big hit symbols It should be decided on the

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, there may be an effect that the effect pattern slips. Here, the term “slip” means effect display in which the symbol is slipped from the predicted stop position immediately before the stop of the symbol in the variable display. In the second super reach, then reach out (reach) by stopping after one of the two rendering symbols that had been temporarily stopped at the outset eyes (combination of the out symbols) in the left and right symbol display areas A combination of symbols is formed, and it is such an effect that reach effect is executed.

  Note that the fluctuation pattern shown in the judgment table at the time of disconnection is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “off”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “normal jackpot”. The variation pattern shown in the probability variation big hit determination table is a variation pattern in which the final display result of the variation indication is the display result of “probability variation big hit”.

  On the basis of these pieces of information, for example, the fluctuation pattern of “fourth super reach (80 seconds)” shown in the “fluctuation pattern” column of FIG. It is shown that it is "the fluctuation pattern of the 4th super reach performed in seconds."

  In the table of FIG. 6, the fields described as “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” have a function as a variation pattern type determination table unit indicating the relationship between “random 2 range” and “variation pattern type” It is a column shown. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, for each of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types such as “normal”, “normal reach” and “super reach”, all values of random 2 (1 to 251) are plural. It is divided into the numerical range of. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, if the value of random 2 extracted at a predetermined timing matches one of the judgment values allocated to 140 to 229 among the random numbers from 1 to 251, for example It is determined that “normal reach” is set as the fluctuation pattern type.

  Further, in the table of FIG. 6, the columns described as “random 3 range” and “variation pattern” indicate the function as a variation pattern determination table unit indicating the relationship between “random 3 range” and “variation pattern”. It is a column. The variation patterns indicated correspondingly to the various types of the variation pattern type determination table are the variation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking Fig. 6 (a) as an example, the variation patterns belonging to the type of "super reach" are "first super reach", "second super reach", "third super reach", and "third 4 super reach.

  All the values of random 3 (1 to 220) are divided into a plurality of numerical value ranges and allocated to each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 6A as an example, when it is determined that the variation pattern type of "super reach" is selected, one of random numbers 1 to 220 extracted from random 3 at a predetermined timing is 1 If it matches with any numerical value of the judgment value allocated to 70, it is determined that it will be set as the fluctuation pattern of "the 1st super reach (50 seconds)."

  When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out, in order to determine the variation pattern, the determination table is selected as follows. In the non-short time state, when the fluctuation display result is out, the normal state out time determination table of FIG. 6A is selected. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the fluctuation display result is released, the time saving state determination table of FIG. 6B is selected. Note that, by using the determination tables of FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B, the reach ratio at the time of the normal state shift and at the time shift state is fixed regardless of the number of reservations.

  When the variation display result is a big hit for the first special symbol or the second special symbol regardless of whether or not the time saving state, in order to determine the variation pattern, the determination table is selected as follows. When the variable display result is usually a big hit, the normal big hit determination table of FIG. 6C is selected. When the variation display result is a probability variation big hit regardless of whether the time saving state or not, the probability variation big hit time determination table of FIG. 6D is selected.

  In the time reduction state deviation determination table of FIG. 6B, the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that of the normal state deviation determination table of FIG. 6A. 6B is shorter than the reach fluctuation (including normal reach fluctuation and super reach fluctuation) in the judgment table at the time reduction state at time shift state compared to the judgment table at the time of normal state loss in FIG. 6A. The ratio determined by normal fluctuation (non-reach is not a deviation fluctuation (a fluctuation resulting in deviation display result)) is high, and the ratio by which fluctuation time is longer than normal fluctuation is determined as a reach fluctuation is low. Data is set.

  As a result, as compared with the non-time-short state (normal state), since the ratio in which the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected is higher in the time-short state, the non-time-short state is the one in the time-short state. The fluctuation display is performed with the fluctuation time shorter on average than at the time of. By selecting the determination table in this manner, the time saving state can be realized. Further, by setting the normal fluctuation so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the short-time state than in the non-short-time state, it is possible to shorten the reserve digestion during the short-time state.

  In the judgment tables of FIG. 6 (a) and FIG. 6 (b), which are selected when they become out of place, the data is set so that the selection ratio of reach type is selected by the height relationship such that normal reach> super reach. It is done. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIG. 6C and FIG. 6D selected when the big hit is made, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected according to the high / low relationship of the ratio such as normal reach <super reach Data is set. As a result, when reaching a big hit, the ratio at which the reach effect of the super reach is performed (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) becomes higher than at the time of the disengagement. The presentation can increase the player's sense of expectation.

  Further, in the determination table of FIG. 6 (d) selected when the big hit is a definite variation big hit, compared to the determination table of FIG. 6 (c), which is usually selected when the big hit is a big hit, The data is set such that the rate at which the type of super reach effect is selected is high. As a result, the ratio at which the reach effect of the super reach is performed (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach at the time the reach is selected) becomes higher when the probability change big hit becomes, compared to the time when the big hit normally occurs. The reach effect of the reach can be performed to increase the player's expectation for the probability variation big hit.

  In addition, such fluctuation pattern, when the sum total reservation memory number (total value) of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol to display variable is more than predetermined number (for example, the total number of reservation memory is 3 or more) By setting the selection ratio to be different when it is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of pending storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the total number of pending storages is less than the predetermined number. It is also possible to execute the pending number shortening control in which However, even under conditions where the number-of-holds reduction control is executed (for example, the total number of held memories is 3 or more), the sense of reach can be maintained by making the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant. In addition, among the reach, only the super reach may not be shortened, and the on-hold time reduction control may be performed. Furthermore, the pending number time reduction control may be executable by selecting the fluctuation time as a short percentage of normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time, or may be performed by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself, The combination may be sufficient.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIG. 7, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the game control state.

  Main commands in FIG. 7 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) for specifying a variation pattern of the production design that is variably displayed on the presentation display 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns which can be used as shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each of the variation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect symbol.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result specification commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type.

  The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (design confirmation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

  The command A 001 to A 002 (H) is a jackpot start designation command for designating a jackpot game state start for each jackpot type (usually a jackpot or a probability variation jackpot).

  The command A1XX (H) is a large winning opening open designation command indicating a display of the number of times (round) of the special winning opening opening indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening a big winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) a special winning opening of the number (round) indicated by XX.

  The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating a jackpot gaming state end for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

  Command A 401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there has been a first start prize. The command A 402 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there has been a second start prize.

  The command B 000 (H) is a normal state designation command which designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low probability state). The command B 001 (H) is a time saving state designating command specifying that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B 002 (H) is a definite change state designation command which specifies that the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state).

  The command C0XX (H) is a first pending storage number specification command for specifying the first pending storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first pending storage number. The command C1XX (H) is a second pending storage number designation command for specifying the second pending storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the second pending storage number.

  In the microcomputer 100 for effect control, the first pending storage number designation command for indicating the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number designation command for indicating the second pending storage number are transmitted. Although it is possible to specify the number of pending storages, the present invention is not limited to this, but whenever the variable display is performed, a pending storage number subtraction specification command for subtracting the first pending storage number or the second pending storage number is transmitted. Thus, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the number of pending storages may be specified.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3 XX (H) are the winning determination results of the big hit determination, big hit type determination, fluctuation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 It is an effect control command indicating the content. Among these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command indicating whether or not to be a big hit among the winning determination results, and a determination result of the type of the big hit. Further, command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating the determination result (determination result of variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is among the winning determination results. It is.

  In this embodiment, in the prize-time effect process (see S1217 and S1228 in FIG. 11), the game control microcomputer 560 is a big hit or not at the start winning, the type of big hit, and the random number for the variation pattern type determination. It is determined which of the determination values falls within the range of the determination value. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating a type of a big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. A value designating the range of the determination value as the determination result of the variation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the variation type command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or not, and the type of the big hit at the start winning, based on the value set in the symbol designation command. The fluctuation pattern type can be recognized based on the fluctuation type command.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of the hold storage buffer in the game control microcomputer 560. As shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area). The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55 (which is an area in the RAM 55), and as shown in FIG. 8A, the maximum value of the value of the total reserved memory number counter which counts the total reserved memory number (8 in this example) An area corresponding to) is secured. FIG. 8A shows an example where the value of the total pending storage number counter is five.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the hold specific area, it is "first" or "second" in the order of winning based on the winning on the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. The data shown is set. Therefore, data that can specify the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 is stored in the hold specific area. The hold specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  FIG. 8B is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a storage area (pending storage buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 8B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55. In the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer, a big hit determination random number (random R) which is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) which is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination random number (Random 2) and a variation pattern determination random number (Random 3) are stored.

  The CPU 56 extracts such random number values from the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number based on the winning on the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, and (1) A process of saving (storing) in the save area of the pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random number values are extracted based on the winning of the first start winning opening 13 and are stored in the first hold storage buffer. Also, based on the winning on the second start winning opening 14, these random number values are extracted and stored in the second hold storage buffer.

  As described above, it may be indicated as "stored on hold" that the information on the start winning combination as described above is stored in the first held storage buffer or the second held storage buffer. The random number for fluctuation pattern type determination (random 2) and the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 3) are not extracted at the start winning combination and stored in advance in the storage area, but will be described later for fluctuation pattern setting processing ( It may be extracted at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol).

  The data stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area in this manner is read out at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display. It should be noted that the data stored in the reserved specific area and the storage area are read out at the start winning game, and before starting the variable display to be notified of the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" etc., special symbol It may be used for the advance notice effect that can be executed based on the hold information etc. of the variable display of.

  When there is a start winning on the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, commands such as a symbol specifying command, a variation type command, and a total holding number of memories specifying command are sent from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. Will be sent. In the start winning winning time reception command buffer provided in the RAM 103 of the effect control microcomputer 100, various commands such as the received symbol specification command, variation type command, total hold storage number specification command, etc. can be stored in association with each other. A storage area for storing data that can specify the received command is secured.

  In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect pattern performed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to the change pattern of the plural types, the change display operation of the effect pattern, reach It is comprised from the data etc. which show the control content of various performance operation | movements, such as a production | presentation display operation in production etc. or various production | production operation | movement which does not accompany the fluctuation | variation display of a production | presentation pattern. Further, the notice effect control pattern is composed of data etc. indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically taken for a predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is executed. As a result, various game control can be performed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initialization processing, initialization processing at normal time, gaming state recovery processing at times other than normal, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern The determination of the type of the object, the update process of various random numbers such as the change pattern determination), and the update process of the initial value random number (update process of the initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for determination per symbol).

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter simply referred to as "S") 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power-off signal is output (is turned on or not) (S20). Next, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input through the input driver circuit 58, and the state of them is determined (switching process: S21) .

  Next, the CPU 56 displays the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the normal symbol display 10, the first special symbol hold memory indicator 18a, the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b, the ordinary symbol A display control process is performed to control display of the hold storage indicator 41 (S22). With regard to the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the normal symbol display 10, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Run.

  In addition, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating random numbers for determination such as a random number per determination for a regular symbol and a random number for big hit classification determination used for game control (random number update processing for determination: S23) . The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (S26). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding processing according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order, and changes the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state Update accordingly.

  In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending out the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a winning ball process for setting the number of winning balls based on the detection signals of the first starting opening switch 13a, the second starting opening switch 14a and the count switch 23 (S30).

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  The CPU 56 also performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

  Furthermore, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 executes the effect display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (S34), and the process ends. By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every predetermined time.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, start opening switch passage processing is executed (S312). Then, depending on the internal state, one of the processes in S300 to S307 is performed.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 stores, as described above, pending storage data (first pending storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13. A second holding storage buffer for storing holding storage data (second holding storage data) such as a jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start winning for the second start winning opening 14; Is provided. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the number of storages of each pending storage is secured in each of these pending storage buffers.

  In the starting opening switch passing process, if the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on, the number of first holding storage data stored under the condition that the first number of holding storages has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved memory number counter that counts the number is incremented by 1, and numerical data from the random number circuit 503 or the counter for generating software random numbers (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination Processing for extracting (random numbers) and storing them in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 14a is turned on, the number of second pending storage data is counted on condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the pending storage number counter is increased by 1, and numeric data (for example, a random number for big hit determination, a random number for variation pattern type determination, and a random number for variation pattern determination) are extracted from the random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating software random numbers. And store them in the storage area of the second pending storage buffer.

  With regard to the following description regarding pending storage, it may be indicated as "pending on storage" that information regarding the start winning combination as described above is stored in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. In addition, numerical data stored in the first storage buffer may be referred to as "first storage storage information", and numerical data stored in the second storage buffer may be referred to as "second storage storage information".

  The processes of S300 to S307 are the following processes. The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the big hit type in the case of a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S301) counts the variation time according to the determination of the variation pattern (determination of the variation pattern type determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number) and the determined variation pattern Is a process for controlling the start of counting of the fluctuation time timer.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for performing control of transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The special symbol variation processing (S303) is processing for advancing the process to the special symbol stop processing when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting processing has elapsed. Special symbol stop processing (S304), when the lapse of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is counted by the fluctuation time timer, the fluctuation display in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b A process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) is processing for performing control to open the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 20 according to the type of the big hit. In the big winning opening open process (S306), control to transmit the production control command for round display production in the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and confirms the establishment of the closing condition of the big winning opening It is a process which performs a process etc. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305). In addition, when all the rounds are finished, it moves to the big hit end processing (S307). The big hit end process (S307) is a process for performing control or the like to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of S312. In the starting opening switch passage process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether the first starting opening switch 13a is in the on state (S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the on state, the process proceeds to S1222. If the first start port switch 13a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first pending storage for counting the first number of pending storages) Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is checked (S1212). If the first pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S1222.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (S1213) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number 1 is increased (S1214). In addition, the CPU 56 holds the combined hold storage in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 described in FIG. 8. Data indicating "first" is set in the area corresponding to the value of the number counter (S1215).

  In this embodiment, when the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the first starting winning opening 13), data indicating "first" is set, When the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on (that is, when the gaming ball starts starting winning in the second starting winning opening 14), data indicating "second" is set. For example, CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data representing “first” when first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area) shown in FIG. 8. When the second start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating "second". In this case, when there is no corresponding pending storage, 00 (H) is set in the pending storage specific information storage area (pending specific area).

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in the hold specific area, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the combined hold memory number counter is secured, and the first start winning opening 13 or Data indicating “first” or “second” in the order of winning based on the winning on the second start winning opening 14 is set. Therefore, in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14 is stored.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers and storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 8B) (see FIG. S1216). In the process of S1216, a jackpot determination random number (random R), a jackpot type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, It is stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect rendering process in which the fluctuation display result and fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed is determined at the time of starting winning (S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S1218), and transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (S1219). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S 1220), sets the value of the total holding memory number counter to the EXT data, and sets the total holding memory number specifying command. Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S1221).

  By executing the processing of S1218 and S1219, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (the gaming state such as the high probability state, the low probability state, the high base state, the low base state, the big hit gaming state, etc.) Every time the start winning hole 13 is started, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize for the first start winning opening 13 is generated by executing the processing of S1218 to S1221, the symbol designating command, the variation type command, and the first start prize designating command And a set of four commands of the total number of pending storage specification commands are transmitted in batch in one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether the second start port switch 14a is in the on state (S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the on state, the process ends. If the second start port switch 14a is in the on state, the CPU 56 determines whether the second number of pending storages has reached the upper limit (specifically, the second pending storage for counting the second number of pending storages) Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is checked (S1223). If the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process ends.

  If the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second pending storage number counter by 1 (S1224) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number 1 increase (S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in the area corresponding to the value of the total suspension storage number counter in the suspension storage specific information storage area (preservation specific area) (S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes processing for extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 8B) (see FIG. S1227). In the process of S1227, the jackpot determination random number (random R), the jackpot type determination random number (random 1), the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted Stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize effect process (S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning (S1229), and controls to transmit the variation type command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control (S1230). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1231), sets the value of the total holding memory number counter to the EXT data, and sets the total holding memory number specifying command. Control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S1232).

  By executing the processing of S1229 and S1230, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (the gaming state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, big hit gaming state, etc.), the second Every time the start winning hole 14 is started, both the symbol designation command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize for the second start winning opening 14 is generated by executing the processing of S1229 to S1232, the symbol designating command, the variation type command, and the second start prize designating command And a set of four commands of the total number of pending storage specification commands are transmitted in batch in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing (S300) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). If there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, the customer wait state designation command specifying the customer wait state mode is executed if the customer wait state designation command has not been transmitted yet. A process for transmission is performed (S77), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. Here, when the customer waiting state designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting state designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting state designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after transmitting the customer waiting state specifying command, the customer waiting state specifying command transmitted flag is repeatedly set based on the flag, and the customer is repeated. It is controlled so as not to send a wait state designation command. Such a customer waiting state designation command transmitted flag is reset when the next time the variable display of the special symbol is started.

  When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the CPU 56 selects the first data of the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 8A) as the “first”. It is confirmed whether or not it is data indicating (S52). If the first data set in the hold specific area is not data indicating "first" (ie, data indicating "second") (N in S52), the CPU 56 selects the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating "second" is set to a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for the special symbol or the second special symbol is processed (S53). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data representing "first" (Y in S52), the CPU 103 sets data representing "first" in the special symbol pointer (S54).

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a depending on whether the data indicating the "first" is set to the special symbol pointer or the data indicating the "second" is set. The variable display of the second special symbol display in the second special symbol display 8b is performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol display is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. Be On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the second special symbol variation display on the second special symbol display 8b based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer Is done.

  By performing the processing of S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol according to the starting winning combination in which the gaming balls have won in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 Or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages of 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55, and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. Are stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second holding storage number = 1 in the second holding storage buffer. It is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the pending storage number counter of the one indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts one from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and for each saving area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift the content. If the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the respective save areas in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 stores the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 55. The stored random number values are stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "the second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 55 The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n-1. In addition, the CPU 56 sums up the values (the value indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the suspension specific area. It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of pending storages = m-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first pending storage numbers (or the respective second pending storage numbers) are extracted is always the first pending storage number (or It agrees with the order of the 2nd pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. Further, the order in which the respective values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1 to 8.

  The count value of the total pending storage number counter formed in the RAM 55 and counting the combined pending storage number is decremented by 1 (S57). Note that the CPU 56 stores the value of the combined pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating the "first" indicating that the processing is performed targeting the first start winning opening 13; that is, the processing indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol Data indicating "" or data indicating "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is, "second" indicating that the processing is to be performed on the second special symbol Data is set to the special symbol pointer. And in subsequent processing in special symbol process processing, processing according to data set to a special symbol pointer is performed. Therefore, the processing of S300 to S307 can be made common to the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the random R (big hit determination random number) from the hold storage buffer and executes the big hit determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in S1216 of the starting opening switch passing processing and S1227 of the starting opening switch passing processing and stored in advance in the first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer. Do. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 5) with a jackpot determination random number and determining that a jackpot will occur if they match. That is, it is a program that executes the process of the big hit determination.

  In the process of the big hit determination, when the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a big hit is higher than in the non-probable change state (normal game state). Specifically, the probability variation time jackpot determination table (the table on the right side of FIG. 5A in the ROM 54 is set) and the number of jackpot determination values are probability variation A normal-time big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 5A in the ROM 54 is set) is provided, which is set smaller than the time big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a definite variation state, and when the gaming state is a definite variation state, the big variation determination processing is performed using the large variation determination table at the positive variation, and the gaming state is normally free When it is in the state or the time saving state, processing of the big hit determination is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 5A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. If it is determined to be a big hit (Y in S61), the process proceeds to S71. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means to decide whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to decide whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol display as a big hit symbol or not It is also.

  It is to be noted that the confirmation as to whether or not the current gaming state is a definite change state is made based on whether or not the positive change flag is set. The probability change flag is set when shifting the gaming state to the probability change state, and is reset when ending the probability change state. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the big hit end process (S307 in FIG. 10) when the probability change big hit occurs, and then, the condition that the next big hit is determined or the fluctuation display that results in the out of display When the condition that the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed is satisfied, the variation display of the special symbol is ended and it is reset at the timing of the stop display of the stop symbol.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in S61), the process proceeds to S75 described later.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches one of the jackpot determination values in S61, the CPU 56 sets a jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot (S71). The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type of FIG. 5 (C) One of the tables for determination is selected (S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the first special symbol big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 5 (B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates the "second", the CPU 56 selects the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (C).

  Next, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot type determination random number extracted in the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and holds using the jackpot type judgment table selected in S72. A big hit type and a big hit symbol corresponding to a value matching the value of the random number (random 1) for big hit type determination stored in the storage buffer are determined (S73).

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (B) and 5 (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the big hit type and the big hit symbol is set so that the big hit symbol differs for each big hit type, Since the big hit type and the big hit symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the big hit symbol and the game control according to the big hit type is simplified, so that it is possible to prevent the game control from becoming complicated.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type to the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as the big hit type data. When the big hit type is “probable variation big hit”, “02” is set as the big hit type data.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (S75). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, the symbol "-" which is an out symbol is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. If the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol determined in S73 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be "probable variation big hit", "7" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "normal jackpot", "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  In the display result designation command transmission process (S302) described above, any one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 3 designation command for designating the display result according to the type of the jackpot determined or the CPU 56 determines the hit. Control to transmit the effect control command (see FIG. 7) is performed.

  In the special symbol variation process (S303) described above, the CPU 56 decrements the variation time timer by 1, and when the variation time timer times out, the value of the special symbol process flag corresponds to the special symbol stop process (S304) Update to a value and proceed to special symbol stop processing.

  As a result of the variable display, when it becomes a big hit, the big winning opening opening pre-processing (S305), the big winning opening open processing (S306), and the big hitting end processing (S307) is executed, control to the big hit gaming state Be done. In the big hit end process (S307), at the end of the definite variation big hit, the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set, and when the big hit is ended normally, the time saving flag is set. By this, after the end of the probability variation big hit, it is controlled to the probability variation state and the short time status, and after the end of the big hit normally, it is controlled to the time short status.

  It is necessary to continue the time-varying state of the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit until either the variable display is executed 100 times or the next big hit occurs. The duration of such fluctuation display 100 times, in the big hit end processing (S307), the time reduction number counter showing the number of times the special symbol can be fluctuated in the time saving state is set to 100 times, and thereafter the fluctuation display is executed The special symbol stop process is controlled by performing subtraction and updating, and the time saving flag is reset based on the count-up of the time saving counter, and control to end the time saving state is performed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing effect control main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the effect control main processing. In the effect control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining the start interval (for example, 2 ms) of effect control (S701) ). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the effect control main process, when the timer interrupt flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets data such as a flag that can specify what the received effect control command indicates. Processing (for example, processing for storing data capable of specifying the received command in various command storage areas provided in the RAM 103) is performed (command analysis processing: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, in order to perform various effects such as fluctuation display of the effect design on the effect display device 9 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S704, the current control of each process according to the control state The process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) is selected to execute effect control.

  Next, random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 100 (SR1-1 for determining the left stop symbol for the production symbol, SR1-2 for determining the middle symbol for the production symbol, SR1-3 for determining the right stop symbol for the production symbol The random number updating process is performed to update the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers (including various random numbers) (S706). Each of such random numbers is generated by counting of a random counter that updates the count value by software, and is cyclically updated within a predetermined range for each, and extracted at the timing determined for each Is used as a random number.

  Next, a hold storage display control process is performed to control the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (move, delete, etc. of the hold display) (S707).

  By such effect control main processing being executed, in the effect control microcomputer 100, according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and By controlling the rendering devices such as the speakers 27L and 27R, various types of rendering control according to the gaming state are performed.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, after the effect control CPU 101 executes the pre-reading effect process (S500) for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect and selecting the type of pre-reading effect, the value of the effect control process flag One of the processes in S800 to S807 is performed in accordance with.

  In the effect control process, the following process is performed. In the effect control process processing, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the variable display of the effect symbol is realized, but the control regarding the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second special symbol The control regarding the fluctuation display of the production design synchronized with the fluctuation of is also executed in one production control process process.

  The pre-reading effect process (S500) is a process for performing pre-reading determination such as whether or not pre-reading effect is to be executed, and determining an effect mode when performing pre-reading effect. With pre-reading effect, before the order of the fluctuation display (pattern fluctuation) of the special symbol based on certain holding information (holding memory information) arrives, the holding information is prefetched and the special symbol fluctuation based on the holding information It is rendering technology such as giving notice at a stage prior to the determination of the content of the display and what will be the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the future. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, it is possible that a big hit may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information before the variable display by the hold information is executed. An effect such as giving notice is performed as a pre-reading effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information targeted for the pre-reading effect will be referred to as “target variable display”.

  The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) is a process for performing a process of confirming whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. If the variation pattern command has been received, the process shifts to rendering symbol variation start processing.

  The effect symbol variation start process (S801) is a process for controlling to start the change display of the effect symbol (decorative pattern). The effect symbol variation process (S802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern. The effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S803) is a process for stopping the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (decoration pattern) and performing control for deriving and displaying the display result of the fluctuation display (final stop symbol).

  The big hit display process (S804) is a process for performing display control such as control for displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the occurrence of a big hit on the effect display device 9 after the fluctuation time ends. The in-round process (S805) is a process of performing display control in the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the process proceeds to the round post-processing, and if the final round is ended, the process proceeds to the big hit end processing. The post-round process (S806) is a process of performing display control between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the processing shifts to the processing during the round. The jackpot end effect processing (S 807) is processing for performing display control to notify the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended in the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 is a process stored in the ROM 102 during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop of the fluctuation display and from the start of the big hit gaming state to the end of the big hit gaming state. Control of the rendering device (component for rendering) such as the rendering display device 9 is performed according to the process data set in the table.

The process table is configured of process timer set values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data etc. is described which indicates the aspect of each variation constituting the variation aspect during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the rendering symbol (decor pattern). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Moreover, the fluctuation time in the aspect of the fluctuation | variation is set to the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.
[Description of hold display and active display]
Here, the hold display and the active display will be briefly described. As already described, the hold storage display unit (total hold) which displays the total number of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number (total hold memory number) at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 9 A storage display unit, a hold display area) is provided. When the variable display of the effect pattern is started, the hold display (the hold display displayed on the leftmost side on the screen) displayed since the oldest is erased. Also, the remaining pending indications are shifted to the left one by one. At the bottom left of the screen, the active display area displaying the active image (active display) indicating the fluctuation-responsive display corresponding to the variable display during execution of the variable display corresponding to the erased (moved, shifted) hold display Is displayed on. In the active display area, the hold display erased with the start of the variable display corresponds to the hold display previously displayed, such as being moved (shifted) to the active display area, for example. The active display is displayed in a identifiable manner. The active display area may be disposed at any position in the display area of the effect display device 9.
[Description of specific effects]
Next, the specific effect will be described. The specific effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the predetermined display corresponding to the variable display. The predetermined display corresponding to the variable display is, for example, a hold display or an active display. Therefore, the specific effect is, for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display. By changing the display mode of the hold display or the active display, it is suggested that the hold display or the active display is advantageous by the player. The advantage for the player is, for example, that the result of the variable display corresponding to the hold display or the active display is a big hit, and the change display of the hold display or the active display is a high reach expected of the big hit It is.

  In the variable display in which the specific effect is executed, the display area of the variable display may be reduced during the specific effect so that the specific effect does not overlap with various effects performed in the variable display. Further, the display area of the screen may be divided to distinguish the area in which the effect relating to the variable display is performed and the area in which the specific effect is performed. In addition, another image display device may be provided, and the specific effect may be performed in the display area. In addition, an action display may be completed to prompt operation of a predetermined operation means by an action display acting on the predetermined display such that a ball, a sword or an arrow collides with or pierces the predetermined display.

The specific example of the specific effect which changes the display mode of a pending | holding display is shown in FIG. Moreover, the specific example of the specific effect which changes the display mode of an active display is shown in each of FIG. 22, FIG. 29, and FIG. First, a specific example of the specific effect of changing the display mode of the hold display will be described.
[Specific effects on hold display (hold change effect)]
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the on-hold change effect. The on-hold change effect is an example of the specific effect on the on-hold display. Further, the on-hold change effect is positioned as one of the pre-reading effects because it is an effect of giving notice of an operation related to the variable display corresponding to the on-hold display by changing the aspect of the on-hold display as a target.

  The on-hold change effect introduced here is an effect that indicates whether the color of the on-target display changes or not because the color ball thrown away toward one on-off display collides with the on-target display on the target and breaks up. It is. The setting here is based on the premise that the color ball must always hit the target holding display, and the player is entertained with an effect of whether or not the ball is broken. Of course, it may be set so that an effect may be generated such that the thrown ball does not collide with the object's hold display. If the ball splits beautifully and the color of the pending display changes, the rendering result is successful, and if the color of the pending display does not change without breaking the ball, it is a failure. When it succeeds, the degree of expectation that the pending display is a big hit is higher than when it fails (see FIG. 17). It is also referred to as "updating" that the color of the reserved display changes to a color with high expectation such as a big hit.

  The hold change presentation of this embodiment is characterized in that the speed of the color ball thrown off toward one of the hold displays is decelerated halfway. In particular, the length of the deceleration period is not uniform, and is determined from at least two types, and the possibility that the rendering result will be successful is higher when the deceleration period is longer than when the deceleration period is short (see FIG. 18). ). However, regardless of which deceleration period is selected, the timing at which the ball starts to decelerate after being thrown is common.

  The effect will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. Various images are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 while the variation display of the effect pattern indicated by the three downward arrows is performed. At the lower end, the image TH or H displaying the generated pending storage information is displayed corresponding to the number of pending storage information (hereinafter referred to as a pending storage image or a pending display). In these pending displays, the pending storage image may be displayed in a form in which the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number are distinguished. At the lower left of the screen, an active display area AHA is displayed. An active display AH is displayed above the active display area AHA.

  Referring to FIG. 15 (a), character 930 having color ball 931 appears during the variable display of the effect pattern. The appearance timing of the character 930 can be set variously. However, it is necessary to prevent the holding display from being wasted by shifting the hold display during the effect period between the appearance of the character 930 and the outcome of success or failure of the effect. Therefore, the character 930 is made to appear at a stage where the remaining period of the variable display is sufficiently longer than the rendering period.

  The character 930 throws the color ball 931 toward the second hold display TH from the left of the four hold displays appearing on the screen. The time from when the character 930 throws the color ball 931 until the color ball 931 encounters the hold indication TH is a predetermined period. The length of the predetermined period is different depending on whether the effect is successful or not, but may be the same. In any case, the speed of the color ball 930 changes in the predetermined period.

  The color ball 931 moves at a constant speed for a certain period of time after it has been thrown (until it moves a predetermined distance), but the speed is reduced when the certain period has elapsed. That is, the deceleration period is entered. The situation is shown in FIG. Such an effect to be displayed after being decelerated (sometimes referred to as an “effect of deceleration control”) is, for example, an effect of slow motion reproduction. The deceleration period is 3 seconds or 5 seconds. However, regardless of which deceleration period is set, the period from when the character 930 throws the ball until it enters the deceleration period is common. After the deceleration period due to such slow motion reproduction, the speed of the color ball 931 returns to the initial speed again, and the color ball 931 eventually collides with the target hold indication TH. Note that the effect may be ended while the vehicle is decelerating without returning to the initial velocity, or the velocity after the end of the deceleration period may be different from the velocity in the initial velocity or the deceleration period.

  After that, the pattern of the effect is that the color ball 931 which has collided is broken, the paint in the cover covers the target display of the target, and the successful pattern in which the color of the display is changed to a different color from the original Instead, it bounces and it divides into a failure pattern in which the color of the hold display does not change. FIG. 15 (c) shows a success pattern, and FIG. 15 (d) shows a failure pattern. In the case of the success pattern, the push button 120 vibrates before the color ball 931 breaks, and the player is notified of the success pattern (button notification effect). This can improve the player's sense of expectation. Of course, the push button 120 may or may not vibrate. Note that such advance notice may be performed by voice or image instead of or in addition to the push button 120. Also, the button notification effect may be determined by lottery. In such a case, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation be higher in the case where the push button 120 vibrates than in the case where the push button 120 does not vibrate. Further, the vibration of the push button 120 may be provided with strength. In such a case, a lottery including the strength of the push button 120 may be performed at the time of the lottery of the button notification effect. Then, the jackpot expectation may be higher in the case where the push button 120 vibrates stronger than in the case where the push button 120 vibrates weakly.

  In the success pattern, the color of the hold display changes from the original color to one of a plurality of colors. For example, the variations of the color are blue, green and red. Such a color difference represents, for example, a difference in the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the pending display will be a big hit. For example, red has the highest jackpot expectation, followed by green and then blue. The player can provide a more entertaining game because it can focus on which color changes in the success pattern. In order to further increase the expectation for the change in color, the movement of the ball may be temporarily stopped at the stage when the color ball 931 collides with the hold display or just before the collision.

  As described above, according to the on-hold change effect described above, since there is a period in which the speed of the color ball 931 is decelerated before the color ball 931 is released and before it collides with the on-hold display, It can enhance the feeling. In particular, the player's sense of expectation is significantly improved as compared with the effect of causing the on-hold display to collide with the color ball 931 at the same speed without reducing the speed of the color ball 931. Further, since the deceleration period is set selectively from among a plurality of items, it is possible to provide a variety of effects while making the player pay attention to the deceleration period.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a hold change presentation execution determination table. The hold change presentation execution determination table is used to determine whether to execute a hold change presentation. In particular, FIG. 16 (A) shows a big hit hold change effect execution decision table, and FIG. 16 (B) shows a loss hold change effect execution decision table. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The big hit on hold change effect execution decision table is a table used when the pending storage serving as the target of the on hold change effect is a big hit. The on-off hold change effect execution determination table is a table used when the on-hold storage to be the target of the on-hold change effect is released. In any table, it is randomly selected whether or not to execute the pending change effect by random number SR2. As shown in the figure, the distribution mode is such that the ratio of “Yes” is selected in the big hit hold change production execution decision table is higher than that of the hold change display production execution decision table, especially The random numbers are distributed such that the probability of becoming a big hit is higher in the case where the on-hold change effect is performed than in the case where the on-hold change effect is performed. By using the hold change presentation execution determination table shown in FIG. 16, the player can be interested in the hold change presentation.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a pending change mode determination table. The hold change mode determination table is used to determine a change in color of the hold display in the hold change presentation. In particular, FIG. 17A shows a big hit retention change mode determination table, and FIG. 17B shows a loss retention change mode determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The jackpot hold change mode determination table is a table used when a hold storage serving as a target for hold change presentation is a big hit. The on-off hold change mode determination table is a table used when the on-hold storage that is the target of the on-hold change effect is released. In any of the tables, the change of the color of the pending display is randomly distributed by the random number SR3 and is drawn.

  The hold change presentation includes a success pattern and a failure pattern (see FIG. 15). The success pattern is a pattern in which the color ball breaks and the color of the hold display changes, and at this time, the color of the hold display changes to any of blue, green, and red. The failure pattern is a pattern in which the color ball does not break, and therefore, the color of the hold display does not change. The changed color of the pending display indicates the expectation that the pending display corresponds to the big hit, for example, red is the highest with big hit expectation, next is green, and then is blue. Also, if the color does not change, the jackpot expectation is lower than in any case where the color changes. As described above, in order to suggest the jackpot expectation according to the color, in the hold change mode determination table, the random numbers SR3 corresponding to the respective colors are allocated as shown in FIG. The color of the hold display before the color change may be any color other than blue, green, and red, and is, for example, white.

  By using the hold change mode determination table shown in FIG. 17, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the changing color as well as whether or not the color of the hold display changes.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a deceleration period determination table. The deceleration period determination table is used to determine the deceleration period when executing deceleration control of the color ball in the hold change effect. The deceleration period is a period from when the velocity of the color ball released by the character begins to decelerate to a velocity different from the initial velocity, and until the deceleration is completed. In particular, FIG. 18A shows a success pattern deceleration period determination table, and FIG. 18B shows a failure pattern deceleration period determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The success pattern deceleration period determination table is a table used when the on-hold change presentation is a success pattern. The failure pattern deceleration period determination table is a table used when the hold change effect is a failure pattern. In any table, it is randomly selected by random number SR4 whether the deceleration period is to be 3 seconds or 5 seconds. As shown in the figure, the mode of distribution is such that the success pattern deceleration period determination table has a higher rate at which the deceleration period of 5 seconds is selected than the failure pattern deceleration period determination table. The random numbers are distributed so that the degree of expectation that the on-hold change effect becomes a success pattern is higher than the case where the deceleration period is long is shorter than when the deceleration period is short. Here, although 3 seconds and 5 seconds were illustrated as a plurality of deceleration periods, other deceleration periods may be adopted, and three or more deceleration periods may be adopted. Note that the deceleration period may be different depending on whether or not it is a big hit.

  As described above, since the degree of expectation of success patterns differs depending on the difference in the deceleration period, the player can be made to pay attention to the deceleration period. In particular, regardless of which deceleration period is set, since the period from the character throwing away the ball to entering the deceleration period is the same, the player is decelerated when the ball starts to decelerate. It is possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation without realizing the long and short of the period.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a presentation execution timing determination table. This table is stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The effect execution timing determination table is used to determine how many times the hold display is shifted to execute the hold change presentation when there are a plurality of hold displays. In the case where there are a plurality of hold displays, the hold display to be subjected to the hold change presentation is a hold display that is captured at the end of the plurality of hold displays. For example, if there are three hold displays, the third hold display from the left is the target of the hold change presentation, and if there are eight hold displays, the eighth hold display from the left is the target of the hold change presentation It becomes. It is determined by random number lottery how many times the target pending display of the object is shifted to the right (at the stage where the pending storage has been digested) using the effect execution timing determination table (the number of pending storage stages).

  In the effect execution timing determination table, the proportion (as a percentage display) of the random numbers allocated to the execution timings of the hold change effect is shown for the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For example, when the total number of pending storages is 2, the second pending display from the left is the target of the pending change presentation, but the timing of the presentation in this case is when the shift occurs once (number of shifts = It is determined in 1). That is, the hold change presentation is started when the hold display on the left of the two hold displays changes to the active display and the hold display on the right shifts to the left.

  When the total number of pending storages is 4, the fourth pending display from the left is the target of the pending change presentation, but the timing of the presentation in this case is when the shift occurs once (number of shifts = 1) When a shift occurs twice (number of shifts = 2) and when three shifts occur (number of shifts = 3), random numbers are determined by lottery. The determination ratio is as follows: shift number = 1 is 45%, shift number = 2 is 30%, and shift number = 3 is 25%.

  As understood from the effect execution timing determination table, regardless of the total number of pending storages, the percentage at which the pending change presentation is executed at the stage where the number of shifts is small is the stage where the number of shifts is larger It is higher than the rate at which rendition is performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the execution opportunity of the on-hold change presentation as much as possible.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing pre-reading advance notice processing. The on-hold change effect is realized by this flowchart. This flowchart is a subroutine of S500 of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not it is at the time of reception of the total pending storage number specification command and the variation type command (S501). If the command is not received, the process ends. If the command is received, it is determined whether the change effect restriction flag is already set (S502). The change presentation restriction flag is a flag for which the set state is held from when the execution of the pending change presentation is determined to when the presentation is finished. The change production restriction flag is a flag for preventing the execution of the hold change presentation from being newly determined even though the hold change presentation has not been finished.

  Therefore, the process ends when the change presentation restriction flag is set, but when it is not set, it is determined whether the total number of holdings is 2 or more (S503). If the total number of holdings is not 2 or more, the processing is ended because the holding change effect is not performed, but if the total number of holdings is 2 or more, whether or not the new holding memory is the variation pattern type of reach It is determined (S504). Here, "new pending storage" is the latest pending storage among a plurality of pending storages (S503), in other words, pending storage corresponding to the pending display displayed on the right side. It is. As already described with reference to FIG. 20, such pending storage may be selected as a target of the pending change presentation. Therefore, in S505, it is determined whether or not the pending storage that can be selected as the target of the pending change presentation is a big hit.

  When it is determined in S505 that the new pending storage is a big hit, the presence or absence of the pending change presentation is determined according to the big hit pending change presentation execution determination table (S506), and the pending change occurs in S507 If it is determined that the hold change mode is determined, then the hold change mode is determined by the jackpot change mode determination table (S508). The pending change mode is roughly classified into success patterns and failure patterns. The success pattern is a pattern in which the color ball that has hit the hold display breaks and the color of the hold display changes, and the failure pattern causes the color ball that hit the hold display to bounce without breaking, and as a result, the color of the hold display changes. There is no pattern. The success pattern is further divided into three patterns of blue, green and red which change the color of the pending display. In S508, it is determined whether to be a failure pattern or three success patterns. If it is determined in S507 that no hold change occurs (no hold change effect is present), the process ends. The big hit reserve change effect execution execution decision table is as shown in FIG. 16 (A), and the big hit hold variation mode determination table is as shown in FIG. 17 (A).

  When it is determined in S505 that the new hold storage is a release, the presence / absence of execution of the hold change presentation is determined according to the release hold change presentation execution determination table (S515), and the hold changes in S515 (hold change presentation) If it is determined that the hold change mode is determined, then the hold change mode is determined by the out-of-hold change mode determination table (S517). In S517, it is determined which one of the three success patterns of blue, green and red the failure pattern or the changing color of the pending display should be. If it is determined in S516 that no hold change occurs (no hold change effect is present), the process ends. The loss-on-hold change effect execution determination table is as shown in FIG. 16B, and the loss-on-hold change mode determination table is as shown in FIG. 17B.

  In the process of S508 or S517, when the pending change mode is determined to be the success pattern (YES in S509), the period for deceleration control is determined by the success pattern deceleration period determination table (S510). On the other hand, in the process of S508 or S517, when the pending change mode is determined to be the failure pattern (NO in S509), the period for which the deceleration control is performed is determined by the failure pattern deceleration period determination table (S510). The success pattern deceleration period determination table is as shown in FIG. 18 (A), and the failure pattern deceleration period determination table is as shown in FIG. 18 (B). The deceleration control period (deceleration period) is determined to be either 3 seconds or 5 seconds as shown in FIG.

  After the deceleration period for setting the success pattern is determined in S510, it is determined that the button notification effect is to be performed (S511). The button notification effect is an effect of notifying the player of a success pattern by vibrating the push button 120 before the color ball 931 breaks, as described with reference to FIG.

  After S511 or S518, a change presentation restriction flag is set (S512). Next, the execution timing of the on-hold change presentation is determined by the presentation execution timing determination table (S513). The effect execution timing determination table is as shown in FIG. By this process, it is determined how many hold display targets of the hold change presentation are shifted to execute the hold change presentation. Next, the content determined in the pre-reading advance notice process is stored in the storage area (S514), and the process ends.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process.

  In the effect symbol variation start process, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined that the variation display result is to be out (S601). Whether or not it is determined to be out of place is determined, for example, by whether or not a display result 1 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area. If it is determined to be out of order, it is checked whether a command corresponding to the non-reach fluctuation pattern has been received as the fluctuation pattern command (S602). Whether or not the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received is determined by, for example, data stored in the variation pattern command storage area.

  When it is determined that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern is received, the display result of out-of-reach is determined as the final stop of the effect pattern using the out-of-pattern determination data table stored in the ROM 102 (S604) , S616. In the off symbol determination data table, numerical data of SR1-1 to SR1-3 are associated with each of a plurality of types of effect symbols.

  In the process of S604, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at a predetermined timing, and a symbol corresponding to the extracted numerical data is left and middle, respectively, using the data design table for determining the outlying symbols. , It is determined as a combination of stop symbols that result in the fluctuation display result of the right effect symbols. Thus, when determining the combination of non-reach losing symbols, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number accidentally matches the combination of the big hit symbols, the correction is made to become the combination of the missing symbols (for example, Each stop symbol is determined by correcting the right symbol by shifting one symbol). Also, if the stop symbol corresponding to the extracted random number happens to be the reach symbol, it is corrected so that it becomes a combination of non-reach out-of-out symbols (for example, correction for shifting the right symbol by 1 symbol) and each stop symbol Is determined.

  If it is determined in the process of S602 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (if it is determined that it is a reach variation pattern), the stop symbol of the rendering symbol constituting the combination of reach symbols is determined (S605), and the process proceeds to S616. In the process of S605, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from each of SR1-1 to SR1-3 at predetermined timings, and the symbols corresponding to the random numbers extracted from SR1-1 are used using the data design table for determining the outlying symbols. A symbol corresponding to a random number determined as the stop symbol of each of the left and right effect symbols forming the reach state and corresponding to the value of the counter extracted from SR1-2 is determined as the stop symbol of the middle symbol. Also in this case, when it happens to be a combination of big hit symbols, each stop symbol is determined by correcting (for example, correcting the middle symbol by one symbol) so as to become the combination of the out symbols.

  In addition, when it is not determined to shift in the processing of S601 (when it is determined to be a big hit) (N in S601), the CPU 101 for effect control has a big hit symbol according to the type of the big hit. The stop design of the production design which constitutes combination is decided (S603), it advances to S616.

  In S603, a combination of hit symbols is determined according to the type of the big hit as follows. The type of big hit from among the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit based on which display result specification command of the display result 2 specification command and the display result 3 specification command is stored in the display result specific command storage area If it is determined that it is decided to make a big hit in a definite variation, numerical data (random numbers) are extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of the SR1-1 and the big variation in a big design (for example, left, Using the data table (table for determining the probability of big hit symbol design) with the relationship between the middle and the right with the odd number combination such as "7,7,7" etc., any positive variation big hit symbol from the extracted value Select and decide the combination of Also, when it is determined that it is determined to be a big hit normally, numerical data (random numbers) is extracted from SR1-1 at a predetermined timing, and a combination of SR1-1 and a big hit symbol (for example, left, middle, etc. Using the data table (usually a big hit design determination table) in which the right is set to a relation of "4, 4, 4", etc. with an even number of square eyes, a combination of any of the normal big hit symbols from the extraction value Choose and decide. The symbol determined in this manner is used as a final stop symbol which is a variable display result before being controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  Next, after effect setting processing (S616) for performing processing (for example, processing such as determination of contents of various effects shown in FIG. 37) for setting various effects in the variable display is performed, the process proceeds to S617. The effect setting process will be described later.

  In S617, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of effect control patterns. In S617, the symbol variation control pattern table according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and various effect control (rendering operation) patterns designated by the effect control pattern of the effect decided in the process of S616, etc. Among the plurality of types of symbol variation control patterns stored in, one of the effect control patterns corresponding to the designated various effect operation patterns is selected and determined as the use pattern.

  In the control pattern table stored in the ROM 102, for example, the effect in the display area of the effect display device 9 in the period from when fluctuation of the effect design is started to when the finalized design symbol becoming the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. Data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as the variable display operation of the symbol, the effect display operation in the reach effect, the effect display operation by the effect of the pseudo ream, and the effect display operation in the advance effect It is stored.

  In addition, each design fluctuation control pattern, for example, the production control process timer set value, the production control process timer determination value, the production display control data, the voice control data, the lamp control data, and the variation display of the production symbol The control data for controlling the various rendering operations according to the contents are included, and the contents of the various rendering control, the switching timing of the rendering control, and the like are set in time series.

  Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern selected in S617 is selected (S618). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S619).

  When the process of S619 is executed, the rendering device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, the effect component as the effect component according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) Control of various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is started (S620). For example, in accordance with the display control execution data, a command is output to VDP 109 in order to cause an effect display device 9 to display an image (including an effect pattern) according to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver substrate 35 in order to perform lighting / extinguishing control of light emitters such as various LEDs. Further, in order to cause the speaker 27 to output an audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display time timer (S621), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol processing (S802). Design fluctuation start processing is executed (S 622). And, the effect design fluctuation start processing ends.
[Modification of specific effect (pending change presentation) on pending display]
In the character 930 shown in FIG. 15, the microcomputer issues one of a plurality of predetermined speeds (for example, three types of low speed, medium speed, and high speed) so as to throw the color ball 931 at any of a plurality of speeds. It may be selected each time. In that case, instead of merely selecting the speed at random, for example, depending on the selected speed, the ratio of success or failure pattern may be different.

  Furthermore, a plurality of positions where the character 930 throws may be set. For example, the microcomputer may select each time from a far distance position where the distance from the target hold display is long and a near distance position where the distance is closer to the long distance position. In such a case, the faster the initial speed of the color ball 931 at the long distance position, the easier it becomes the success pattern, and the slower the initial speed of the color ball 931 at the short distance position, the easier it becomes the success pattern. When the initial speed of the color ball 931 at a long distance position is slow, it takes a long time before the color ball 931 collides with the target display of the object, so the effect is extended, but by making the initial speed faster It can be prevented that it is extended. On the other hand, if the initial speed of the color ball 931 at the short distance position is fast, the color ball 931 collides with the target display of the object in a short time, so the player may not sufficiently enjoy the effects. By delaying, it is possible to secure time for the player to fully enjoy the effects.

  Even when the character 930 throws the color ball 931 at any one of a plurality of speeds, it is conceivable that the speed at the time of deceleration when entering the deceleration period is common to all. By sharing the speed at the time of deceleration, it is possible to simplify the deceleration control as compared with the case of selectively setting the speed at the time of deceleration among a plurality of speeds.

  In the on-hold change effect, the deceleration control may not necessarily be involved, and the deceleration control may not be involved. In this case, the player's expectation for the execution of the deceleration control should be enhanced if it is designed such that the one with the deceleration control has higher expectation than the one with the deceleration control than in the case without it. Can.

  The deceleration period of the color ball can be set variously. For example, it may be possible to return to the original speed before the color ball collides with the hold display. Further, even if the pattern is a success pattern, the push button 120 may not vibrate. In addition, even if it is a failure pattern, the push button 120 may vibrate even though the ratio is lower than that of the success pattern.

  When executing a pattern in which the rendering result fails, the color ball does not collide with the target hold display while the deceleration control continues, but the color ball speed returns to the original speed before the collision, and the hold is performed. It may be allowed to pass without colliding with the display, falling or after colliding with the display.

  As an example in which the action display acts on the predetermined display, an example in which the color ball acts is given here. However, instead of such an action indication, the action indication may be provided, for example, by giving an effect such that the periphery of the target retention indication changes to a color different from the color of the other retention indication.

  In addition, when performing deceleration control, an area including a change target (pending display or active display as predetermined display, etc.) and an action (color ball as action display) in the background image in accordance with the timing of deceleration. The brightness of the screen may be changed with other areas. Specifically, it is possible to make the user pay attention to a specific effect (hold change effect or active hold change effect described later) by darkening the background image other than the change target and the action at the deceleration timing. Conversely, highlighting may be performed by brightening the change target and the agent, or by adding a predetermined effect image to the change target and the agent. The setting of the brightness may be performed on only one of the change target and the action.

  The on-hold change effect shown in FIG. 15 is an effect related to the change in the on-hold display. However, such an effect may be diverted to an active hold change effect relating to a change in active display. Specifically, referring to FIG. 15, character 930 does not throw the ball toward holding display H, but effects directing the ball toward active display AH. As the contents of the effect, it is assumed that the success pattern and the failure pattern are changed according to the one described with reference to FIG. The control may also be performed using the tables shown in FIGS.

  The deceleration control may be performed other than the on-hold change effect or the on-hold change effect. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed at the center of the screen during fluctuation, and deceleration control may be performed when the action display acts on the predetermined image. The predetermined image is an image that is not related to the hold display or the active display. Then, by the action display acting on a predetermined image, a successful pattern and a failing pattern may be provided. In the successful pattern, the action display may be completed by acting on the predetermined image to prompt the operation of the operation unit such as the push button 120 or the like. Such an effect may be performed in a normal gaming state, or may be performed during a high probability or during a short time. More specifically, if an image of a hand is displayed at the center of the screen during high probability, an image showing a button jumps there, deceleration control is started in front of the hit, and an image of the hand catches the button image , And may be developed into an effect of an operation promotion display for prompting a button operation, and the effect may be ended if the image of the hand can not catch the image. Then, by operating the push button while the effect of the operation promotion display is being performed, an effect may be performed in which an image indicating that a big hit or a loss has occurred is displayed.

The pending display may be represented by something other than an image. For example, the hold display may be indicated by lighting of an LED or the like. Then, the deceleration control of the image shown as the action display may be performed in front of the LED corresponding to the hold display. In the failure pattern, the lighting color of the LED is not changed, and in the success pattern, the lighting color of the LED may be changed.
[Specific effects on active display (active hold change effect)]
FIG. 22 is a diagram for explaining the active hold change presentation. Active pending change presentation is an example of specific presentation relating to active display. In addition, the active hold change presentation is positioned as one of the presentation for giving notice of the operation regarding the on-going variable display by changing the mode of the active display.

  The active hold change presentation introduced here is an presentation showing whether or not the color of the active display changes by the color ball thrown away toward the active display hitting the active display and being split. The setting here is based on the premise that the color ball must always hit the target holding display, and the player is entertained with an effect of whether or not the ball is broken. If the ball splits beautifully and the color of the active display changes, the rendering result is successful, and if the color of the active display does not change without the ball breaking, it is a failure. When successful, the degree of expectation that the result of the on-going variable display becomes a big hit is higher than that when unsuccessful, and the degree of expectation also differs depending on the changing color (see FIG. 24).

  For example, the variations of the color are blue, green and red. Such a color difference represents, for example, a difference in the degree of expectation that the on-going variable display becomes a big hit. For example, red has the highest jackpot expectation, followed by green and then blue. Except for the fact that the target is an active display, and the point that there is no deceleration period, the active on-hold change effect shown in FIG. 22 shares the effect contents on the on-hold change effect described with reference to FIG.

  In particular, the difference between the active reserve change effect shown in FIG. 22 and the reserve change effect shown in FIG. 15 lies in the success rate (the color of the active display changes) depending on the position of the character 930 throwing the color ball 931. The rate at which the success pattern comes to the highest color (red) at the stage of the big hit expectation is the point of difference. The type of the character 930 is the same regardless of the difference in the position. As described above, since the character 930 is common, it is possible to make the player feel as if the character 930 moved the place when the position is changed. However, different characters may be displayed depending on the position.

  The effects will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. The active display area AHA, the active display AH, and the hold display H are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 during the variable display of the effect pattern indicated by the three downward arrows.

  Referring to FIG. 22 (a), character 930 carrying color ball 931 appears at position A during the variable display of the effect pattern. When the character 930 appears, it is displayed on the screen that the operation of the push button is effective (not shown). At this time, when the push button 120 is operated once, the character 930 moves from the position A to the position B, and when the push button 120 is operated once, the character 930 moves from the position B to the position C, and further the push button One operation of 120 moves the character 930 from position C to position A. As described above, in response to the operation of the push button 120, the position of the character 930 changes repeatedly as A → B → C → A → B. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of changing the start position of the effect. From the active display AH, the position A is closest and the position C is farthest. FIG. 22B shows a state in which the position C is selected as the position of the character 930. Note that the effective period of the operation is predetermined, and the effective period of the operation may be counted down on the screen.

  FIG. 22C shows that the character 930 is throwing the color ball 931 from the position A closest to the active display AH. The color ball 931 eventually collides with the active display AH. Subsequently, FIG. 22 (d) shows that the color ball 931 is finely broken and the color of the active display AH is changed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 22 (e) shows that the character 930 is throwing the color ball 931 from the position C farthest from the active display AH. The color ball 931 eventually collides with the active display AH. Subsequently, FIG. 22 (f) shows that the color ball 931 is bouncing back without being broken. Therefore, at this time, the color of the active display AH does not change.

  In this active hold change effect, the closer the position where the character 930 throws the ball to the active display AH, the higher the rate at which the effect is a success pattern, and therefore the higher the rate at which the color of the active display AH rises. Therefore, from that point of view only, the player desires to set the position of the character 930 to the position A by operating the push button 120. However, in this active hold change effect, the proportion of the color of the active display AH that can only be achieved in red among the three types of colors as the position where the character 930 throws a ball is closer to the active display AH. Is high.

  That is, if the active display is a big hit, the color of the active display AH should normally be raised to the red with the highest expected hit in the success pattern, but the position of the character 930 at that time is at the position A. If it is set, the success pattern is selected at a high rate, but the rise color at that time is set to the lowest expectation blue instead of red. In other words, although the position A is easy to see the effect of the rise, the color of the rise indicated by the effect does not reach the color corresponding to the expected level of the big hit, but the stage of the stage in terms of the big hit more than that It means that the possibility of being restricted to low color is high. In this case, the player has to feel anxious feeling that the original rising color according to the jackpot expectation degree may be a color higher than that.

  On the other hand, as the position where the character 930 throws the ball is farther from the active display AH, the ratio of the effect becoming a success pattern is lower, so the chance of being able to see the rising effect decreases, but fortunately, the success pattern When you can see, the color of the rise at that time is that it is highly likely to be the color corresponding to the original big hit expectation. For example, if a presentation is performed at the most street position C from the active display AH when a big hit is determined, a success pattern is unlikely to occur, but if a success pattern occurs, the color at that time is the actual expectation It will be shown. As a result, the player can detect the true jackpot expectation from the color that has developed.

  As described above, in this active reserve change presentation, the ratio of the success pattern and the degree of the color restriction created when the presentation becomes the success differ depending on the position at which the presentation is started. In order to realize such an effect, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the color of the rise of the active display AH in the success pattern is determined in two steps.

  As a first step, without considering the position of the character 930, the upset color is determined from the viewpoint of whether or not the active display is a big hit. The color determined at this time is referred to as the "final color". Since the final color is a color determined from the viewpoint of whether the active display is a big hit, the color faithfully reflects the expectation that the active display will be a big hit. However, whether the determined “final color” is actually used for rendering or a color with a lower expected level of big hit is used for rendering depends on the determination in the next second stage.

  As a second step, the indicator representing the jackpot expectation is “finally” by actually using the “final color” determined in the first step for presentation in consideration of the pitching position of the character, or by applying a limitation thereto. Color "Decide if you want the following color. For example, even if the "final color" is red, the color to be adopted as the actual rising color is blue if a restriction is applied. The details of the determination of these first and second stages will become more apparent from the description of FIGS. 24 to 28.

  In this active on-hold change effect, since the position closer to the active display AH has higher expectation of the success pattern, it is possible to provide an effect consistent with the player's assumption that the near position is likely to change. In this active reserve change effect, the effect of the deceleration control described with reference to FIG. 15 may be added, and as a failure pattern, an effect that the thrown ball does not collide with the active display also occurs It may be set to be possible.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an active hold change presentation execution determination table. The active hold change presentation execution determination table is used to determine whether to execute the active hold change presentation. Whether or not to execute the active hold change presentation is randomly selected by random number SR5. As shown in the figure, the mode of the distribution is set such that the ratio of presence of production and non-production is 2: 3. This table is stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an active-hold final color determination table. The active hold final color determination table is used to determine the type of color (color of upset) when changing the color of the active display in the active hold change presentation. As already explained, the rise color actually used for rendering may be different from the "final color" determined here. In particular, FIG. 24A shows the big hit active hold final color determination table, and FIG. 16B shows the off active hold final color decision table. These tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80.

  The big hit active hold final color determination table is a table used when the active display targeted for the active hold change presentation is a big hit. Out-of-time active hold final color determination table is a table used when the active display targeted for active hold change presentation is out. In each table, the “final color” is distributed by random number SR5 and is drawn. As shown in the figure, with respect to the mode of distribution, for no change, the selectivity is higher in the case of outliers than in the case of big hit, and for blue, green and red, the probability of big hit becomes higher in that order It is considered to be an aspect like this. The “final color” is a provisionally determined uprising color selected based on the active hold final color determination table regardless of the position of the character to be thrown.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process. The effect setting process is a subroutine executed in S616 of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not a change presentation restriction flag is set (S901). When the change presentation restriction flag is set, the process is terminated so that the presentation is not performed redundantly. On the other hand, when the change production restriction flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation to be executed this time is reach (S902). When it is not reach, the processing is ended. From the table, the presence or absence of execution of the active hold change presentation is determined (S903). The active hold change presentation execution determination table is as shown in FIG.

  In S904, when it is determined that the active reserve change effect is performed, it is determined whether the currently displayed variable display is a big hit, that is, whether the active display corresponds to a big hit (S905). If it is a big hit, the final color of the active hold is determined by the big hit active hold final color determination table (S906), and if it is not a big hit or a fall, the active hold final color decision table is active hold The final color of is determined (S908). The big hit active hold final color determination table and the off active hold final color determination table are as shown in FIG. By these determination processes, a rising color when the active hold change presentation is successful is tentatively determined.

  After S906 or S908, the determined content is stored in the storage area (S907), and the process ends.

  FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing processing during effect symbol fluctuation. The effect symbol variation process is a subroutine executed in S802 of FIG. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (S842). Then, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (S843).

  The process proceeds to S846 until the process timer times out (S843N). When it is determined in S843 that the process timer has timed out (S843 Y), the process data is switched (S844). That is, the process timer is newly started by setting the process timer set value set next in the process table to the process timer (S844). In addition, the next process data, such as changing the control state for the rendering device (component for presentation), based on the process data such as display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next to the process data The rendering device is controlled in accordance with the contents of (S845).

  Next, in response to the operation of the push button 120, operation effect processing is performed (S846). The details of the operation effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, based on the value of the fluctuation time timer, it is checked whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (S847). If the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in S848), the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S803) (S849). On the other hand, when the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (S 847 N), it is checked whether or not the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the design confirmation designation command has been received is set (S 848). When the confirmation command reception flag is not set (S 848 N), the process of rendering symbol variation is finished. On the other hand, when the confirmation command reception flag is set (S848 Y), the process proceeds to S849. As described above, even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (S 847 N), the control shifts to control to stop fluctuation when the symbol determination designation command is received, so long fluctuation time due to, for example, noise between boards Even when the fluctuation pattern command indicating “” is received, the fluctuation of the rendering symbol can be ended when the normal fluctuation time has elapsed (when the fluctuation of the special symbol is ended).

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the relationship between the start position of the effect, the success rate, and the change rate. The data of the correspondence shown in the figure is stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. As described in conjunction with the description of the active reserve change presentation using FIG. 22, in the active reserve change presentation, depending on the position at which the presentation is started, the proportion that becomes the success pattern and the color that rises when it becomes the success pattern The degree of restriction is different. Positions A, B, and C shown in FIG. 27 correspond to the respective positions on the screen shown in FIG.

  When the character throws a color ball at the position A closest to the active display, that is, when the active hold change effect is started at the position A, the rate (success rate, expectation) that the success pattern is selected as the effect pattern is 100. %. That is, when the active hold change presentation is started at the position A closest to the active display among the positions, the player can always see the presentation of the success pattern. However, at that time, the percentage of the final display color determined temporarily according to the display result of the variable display is only 20%, and the percentage of the big hit expectation is 80%. It is determined to be the lowest first stage color, that is, blue.

  When the character throws a color ball at the position C farthest from the active display, that is, when the active hold change effect is started at the position C, the rate (success rate) that the success pattern is selected as the effect pattern is only 20%. Absent. That is, when the active hold change effect is started at the position C farthest from the active display among the positions, the player sees the effect of the success pattern as compared with the case where the effect is started at other positions. There is less chance of doing it. However, the percentage of the final display color of the active display determined according to the display result of the variable display is 100%, and if the success pattern can be seen, The player can have confidence in the degree of expectation of the big hit indicated by the rising color at that time.

  Therefore, from the viewpoint that the player wants to see the success pattern as much as possible or to increase the reliability of the rising color indicated by the success pattern, the position at which the active hold change presentation is started is operated by his own operation. It can be selected. For this reason, the player's intention can be reflected in the effect, and more entertaining player participation type effects can be provided.

  In addition, the success rate and the change rate of color shown in FIG. 27 can be variously adjusted in the range which can exhibit the effect mentioned above. For example, at position A, the color may not change to the final color and may change to only the first color, and at position C, the color may change to the first color at a very slight rate. It may be possible to Also, when changing at the position C, it may be changed to a special aspect (special color) that can be seen only at the position C. The special mode is, for example, a mode in which the active display is displayed with a color that changes to rainbow when determined to be a big hit.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the operation effect process. The operation effect process is a subroutine executed in S846 of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not to execute the active hold change presentation (S860). When the active hold change presentation is not performed, the process ends. However, when the active hold change presentation is performed, it is determined whether it is during the operation valid period of the push button 120 (S861). If it is not in the operation valid period of the push button 120, the process proceeds to S865. If it is in the operation valid period of the push button 120, it is determined whether the operation of the push button 120 is detected (S862). If the operation is not detected, the process proceeds to S864, but if the operation is detected, the start position of the active hold change presentation is changed according to the button operation (S863). Specifically, each time an operation is detected, the position of the character 930 shown in FIG. 22 is changed to position A → B → C → A → B.

Next, it is judged whether or not it is the end time of the operation effective period (S864), but if it is not the end time the process is ended once, but if it is the end time, the start position of the effect selected at the current time From the above, the content of the active hold change presentation is determined according to “the relationship between the start position of the presentation and the success rate and the change rate” shown in FIG. 27 (S865). As a result, in this step, whether the effect pattern is a success pattern in which the color appearance of the active display occurs or a failure pattern in which the color appearance of the active display does not occur, and when it is the success pattern, the appearance pattern It is determined whether the color is to be the “final color” previously determined in S906 or S908 of FIG. 25 or the color of one step (red). Next, the determined content is stored in the storage area (S866), and the process ends.
[First modification of active hold change production (one-shot notification)]
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a first modified example of the active hold change presentation. It is possible to add the effect pattern of the 1st modification described below to the pattern of the active pending change effect already explained. The first modification is an example in which after the failure pattern of the active hold change presentation, the battle production starts and the color of the active display suddenly rises without accompanying the action presentation such as a ball before the result of the battle production is obtained. is there. The battle effect is an effect indicating whether or not the current variable display is a big hit depending on the result of the outcome. Since the color of the active display is developed before the result of the battle production comes out, the color made up is to predict the result of the battle production.

  The first modification proceeds in the same manner as the failure pattern of the active hold change effect shown in FIG. 22 (FIGS. 29A to 29C). In particular, in the example of FIG. 29, an example is shown in which the rendering is started from the position C farthest from the active display. As described above, when the effect is started from the position C farthest from the active display, the rate at which the failure pattern is selected is high (see FIG. 27). For this reason, the player who daresly select the position C as the start position of the presentation may not be able to see the success pattern, and may be disappointed.

  However, by making it possible to generate a pattern as in the first modified example, it is possible to draw in the entertainingness of the presentation for which the player who has been disappointed once continues again. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (c), when reach is generated on the screen after the failure pattern is displayed (FIG. 29 (d)), battle rendition on the screen is started. The player waits for the result, but in the middle of the battle rendition, the color of the active display is generated without any foresight (Fig. 29 (e)). It is desirable that the color of the rise at this time be the “final color” described with reference to FIG. Then, the player can infer the possibility of the big hit with the original rising color in which the big hit expectation is reflected.

  Alternatively, in the pattern of such a first modified example, the player is not the “final color” desired for the player because of the failure pattern (FIG. 29C), and the big hit is expected than the “final color”. The index of the degree may be set to a low color only.

  Alternatively, such a pattern of the first modification may be implemented only when the display result is a big hit. In that case, the upset color may be a special color (eg, rainbow color) indicating that the big hit has been determined.

By adding such a modification 1, the width of the effect can be expanded. In particular, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of disappointment when the failure pattern occurs. In addition, according to the success rate shown in FIG. 27, when the failure pattern is selected, the pattern of the modification 1 may be controlled to be selected by random number lottery. In addition, although it has been described here that the color of the active display is raised without any prior notice after the battle rendition, the remark serving as the indication may be added first.
[Second modification of active hold change production (timer change production)]
Next, a second modification of the active hold change presentation will be described using FIG. 30 to FIG. FIG. 30 is a diagram for describing a second modification of the active hold change presentation. It is conceivable to add the effect pattern of the second modified example described below to the pattern of the active hold change effect already described or to the one obtained by further adding the first modified example. Of course, a pachinko gaming machine that executes only the second modification may be used as the active hold change presentation.

  In the second modification, the color of the ball is sequentially changed while the character repeats alternating movement of the ball between the right hand and the left hand within a fixed time (for example, 10 seconds), and the fixed time is fixed. When elapsed, the character is thrown toward the active display to cause the color of the active display to change to the color of the ball. Hereinafter, the active hold change presentation related to the second modification is referred to as "timer change presentation".

  FIG. 30A is a view for explaining the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the timer change effect relating to the second modification is performed. Moreover, FIG.30 (b)-(f) expand and show the display image regarding timer change presentation among the various images displayed on the display screen of the effect display apparatus 9. FIG. In FIG. 30, the suggestion display 910 includes a character image and a ball image 911. The suggestion display 910 is an image that suggests that the active display AH in the active display area AHA changes. Further, the timer display 920 is an image showing an execution time of the timer change effect. When the value of the timer display 920 becomes a value indicating 0 seconds, the character throws the ball image 911 so that the ball image 911 acts on the active display AH, and an effect that the display mode of the active display AH is changed is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, during the variable display, a timer change effect is executed in the display area on the upper right of the effect display device 9. During the timer change effect, a suggestion display 910 in which the character plays a game and a timer display 920 displayed below the suggestion display 910 are superimposed and displayed on the display area of the effect display device 9. The suggestion display 910 and the timer display 920 are images to be superimposed and displayed in the upper right display area of the effect display device 9. In such an image, the area required for display does not become too large, so that various effects performed in the variable display can be prevented from being inhibited.

  Further, the timer display 920 indicates an execution period of the timer change effect. Specifically, in the timer display 920, updating of the counted value to be counted down is executed from the initial value of the clock value set at a predetermined timing, and finally, the value of the timer display indicates 0 (0 seconds Value). Based on the value of the display of the timer becoming 0, the display mode of the predetermined display is changed in relation to the timer change effect being executed. The timer change effect is an effect until the value of the timer display 920 becomes 0 in this manner and the display mode of the predetermined display changes. Such timer display 920 counts down the digital display over time. Here, the timer display 920 actually counts down also for the two digits below the second, but is not disclosed in detail on the drawing. In addition, it is possible to count down only the number of seconds such as “10”, “9”.

  As shown in FIG. 30B, when the timer change effect is started, the character and the ball image 911 are displayed as a suggestion display 910 that suggests that the display mode of the active display AH changes. The color of the ball image 911 at the start of the timer change effect is blue. Such a blue color is the same as the color of the hold display H shown in the hold display area 18c. The hold display H is displayed in blue. Further, the active display AH is usually displayed in blue, and the color may change due to the timer change effect. In the color of the active display AH, the jackpot expectation increases in the order of blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color. The character throws a ball image 911 upwards to be a beanbag. The timer display 920 displays “10:00”, which indicates that the timer change effect is executed for 10 seconds.

  After 3 seconds have elapsed from the state of FIG. 30B, as shown in FIG. 30C, the timer display 920 displays “07:00” indicating that the remaining time for the timer change effect is 7 seconds. . At this time, the color of the ball image 911 changes from blue to green (hatched in the drawing). The change in color improves the jackpot expectation. Then, after 9 seconds have passed from the start of the timer change presentation, as shown in FIG. 30 (d), the timer display 920 displays “01:00” indicating that the remaining time of the timer change presentation is 1 second. Ru. The color of the ball image 911 is green, as in the state of FIG.

  After 1 second has elapsed from the state of FIG. 30 (d) (after 10 seconds from the timer change effect), as shown in FIG. 30 (e), the timer display 920 shows “00:00” and the remaining time of the timer change effect is It is shown that it is 0 seconds. Then, when 0 seconds are reached, an effect is performed in which the character displayed as the suggestion display throws the ball image 911 toward the active display area AHA. The thrown ball image 911 hits the active display AH, as shown in FIG. 30 (f). When the ball image 911 is hit, the display mode of the active display AH changes from blue to green of the related mode of the timer change effect. The change from blue to green improves the expectation of the variable display being performed.

  As described above, during the execution of the timer change effect, since the execution period of the timer change effect can be notified by the timer display 920, as shown in FIGS. 30 (e) and 30 (f), the display mode of the active display AH. Can be made clear. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the display value of the timer display 920 in a period until the timer display 920 reaches 0 seconds, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 30B and 30C, since the big hit expectation improves by changing the color of the ball image 911 in the suggestion display 910 during execution of the timer change effect, the ball image in the suggestion display 910 The player can be made to pay attention to the display mode of 911.

  FIG. 31 is a timing chart for explaining the execution period of the timer change effect. The horizontal axis of the timing chart indicates time (t), and the low level indicates the fluctuation stop, and the high level indicates the fluctuation. In this embodiment, of the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach shown in FIG. 6, the timer change effect is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach. The variation patterns of the super reach are provided with the variation patterns of the first to fourth super reach. When the variation pattern command specifying the variation pattern of the super reach is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control CPU 101 executes the effect of the designated super reach based on the transmitted command. In the first to fourth super reach in FIG. 6, any SP reach is executed from among a plurality of types of special reach (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “SP reach”) for each variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the SP reach, one of the effect symbols in the variable display is a reach. Thereafter, after reaching a reach state, after a predetermined time has elapsed (after normal reach or after reach effect different from normal reach), it develops into SP reach. The SP reach implemented in Super Reach is a high-expected reach that results in a big hit as compared to a normal reach that does not develop to an SP reach and does not produce a flashy effect after the reach. During the SP reach, for example, effects such as battle effects are executed on the liquid crystal screen. The battle effect is an effect such that a big hit display result is displayed when an ally character and an enemy character fight and the ally character wins, and an off display result is displayed when the ally character is defeated.

  The timer change presentation is performed in a period until such SP reach is performed. In this way, the player can be made to pay attention to the timer change effect before the SP reach. Also, with regard to the SP reach effect with a high probability of big hit, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect without inhibiting the effect by the SP reach.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a timer change presentation execution determination table. The timer change presentation execution determination table is a data table used for a lottery for determining whether to execute the timer change presentation. The timer change presentation execution determination table includes the big hit timer change presentation execution determination table of FIG. 32 (A) and the disconnection timer change presentation execution determination table of FIG. 32 (B). These timer change presentation execution determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the presentation control board 80.

  According to the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing, the big hit time timer change effect execution determination table of FIG. 32 (A) has a magnitude relation that the selection ratio is “execute timer change effect> do not execute timer change effect”. Thus, the data is set such that the rate at which the decision to execute the timer change presentation is selected is higher. According to the value of SR2 extracted at a predetermined timing, the out-of-time timer change presentation execution determination table in FIG. 32B has a magnitude relation that the selection ratio is “execute timer change presentation <do not execute timer change presentation” Thus, the data is set such that the rate at which the decision not to execute the timer change effect is selected is higher.

  When the display result of the variable display targeted for the timer change effect becomes the big hit display result by the setting of the data in FIGS. 32A and 32B, the timer change effect is executed as compared with the time when the out-of-out display result is obtained. Rate will be higher. Therefore, when the timer change effect is executed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be raised more than when the timer change effect is not executed.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a timer change presentation execution time determination table. The timer change presentation execution time determination table is a data table used for a lottery for determining the time (seconds) in which the timer change presentation is executed for each change. The timer change presentation execution time determination table includes the jackpot timer change presentation execution time determination table of FIG. 33 (A) and the disconnection timer change presentation execution time determination table of FIG. 33 (B). These timer change presentation execution time determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the presentation control board 80.

  The big hit timer change effect execution time determination table of FIG. 33 (A) has the magnitude relation that the selection ratio of the timer change effect execution time is “10 seconds <15 seconds <20 seconds” by the value of SR3 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the long timer change presentation execution time (long number of seconds) is selected is higher. In the out-of-time timer change presentation execution time determination table in FIG. 33B, the selection ratio of the timer change presentation execution time is “10 seconds> 15 seconds> 20 seconds” according to the value of SR3 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the short timer change effect execution time (short number of seconds) is selected is higher.

  When the display result of the variable display targeted for the timer change effect becomes the big hit display result by setting the data in FIGS. 33 (A) and (B), the timer change effect of a longer time The percentage determined for execution time is high. Therefore, when the execution time of the timer change presentation is long, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be raised more than when the execution time of the timer change presentation is short. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which display mode of the timer display 920 is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33, a plurality of execution times of the timer change effect are provided. Therefore, since there are a plurality of display modes initially displayed as the timer display 920, effects by the timer display 920 become diverse, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a change number determination table for the timer change effect. In the change number determination table, the number of times of color change of the ball image 911 is determined in the timer change effect. The change number determination table includes the big hit time change number determination table of FIG. 34 (A) and the loss time change number determination table of FIG. 34 (B). These change number determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. The degree of expectation of being a big hit differs depending on the number of times of color change of the ball image 911.

  The timer change presentation execution time (seconds) in the change number determination table indicates the execution time of the timer change presentation. In this embodiment, the number of changes is set to two patterns every 10 seconds, 15 seconds, and 20 seconds. If the execution time of the timer change effect is 10 seconds, the number of times of change is determined to be either zero or one. The number of times of change being zero indicates that the color of the ball image 911 does not change from blue in the timer change effect. In addition, when the execution time of the timer change effect is 15 seconds, the number of times of change is determined to be either once or twice. In addition, when the execution time of the timer change effect is 20 seconds, the number of times of change is determined to be either two times or three times.

  In the big hit time change number determination table of FIG. 34 (A), the selection rate is "0 times <1 time" according to the value of SR 4 extracted at a predetermined timing for the variable display with timer change effect execution time of 10 seconds. The data is set such that the rate of selection of a large number of changes is higher, so that the magnitude relationship is obtained. In addition, for variable display with a timer change effect execution time of 15 seconds, a large number of changes is selected so that the selection ratio has a magnitude relation of “1 time <2 times” by the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set to be higher for the rate of In addition, for the variable display with a timer change effect execution time of 20 seconds, a large number of changes is selected so that the selection ratio has a magnitude relationship of “2 times <3 times” by the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set to be higher for the rate of

  Further, in the change-time-of-changes determination table of FIG. 34 (B), for the variable display with a timer change effect execution time of 10 seconds, the selection ratio is “0 times> 1 times according to the value of SR4 extracted at predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate of selection of the small number of changes is higher so that the magnitude relationship of In addition, for the variable display with a timer change effect execution time of 15 seconds, a small number of changes is selected so that the selection ratio has a magnitude relation of “1 time> 2 times” by the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set to be higher for the rate of Further, with respect to the variable display with the timer change effect execution time of 20 seconds, data is set such that the value is constantly determined twice by the value of SR4 extracted at a predetermined timing. As described above, since there is no case in which the ball image 911 changes three times as a change pattern at the time of detachment, it is determined that a big hit occurs by changing three times.

  When the display result of the variable display targeted for the timer change effect becomes the big hit display result by the setting of the data in FIGS. 34 (A) and (B), which timer change effect execution is executed compared with the time when the out display result is As for time, the ratio determined to be the number of more changes increases. Therefore, when the number of times of change of the ball image 911 is large in the timer change effect, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be raised more than when the number of times of change is small.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the timer change effect. In the change pattern determination table, the change pattern of the color of the ball image 911 in the timer change effect is determined. The change pattern determination table includes the big hit change pattern determination table of FIG. 35 (A) and the out-of-time change pattern determination table of FIG. 35 (B). These change pattern determination tables are stored in the ROM 102 provided on the effect control board 80. Here, in the table shown in FIG. 35, the degree of jackpot expectation increases as the color changes. The jackpot expectation increases in the order of blue <yellow <green <red <rainbow color. Rainbow color is a color that is determined only in the case of a big hit.

  When the number of changes is one, the big hit change pattern determination table in FIG. 35 (A) has a selection ratio of ““ change pattern from blue to yellow ”<“ blue ”according to the value of SR5 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to green is selected is higher in order to have the magnitude relationship of “the change pattern of green”. Also, if the number of changes is two, the selection ratio is said to be “blue → yellow → green change pattern” <“blue → green → red change pattern” according to the value of SR5 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to red is selected so as to have a magnitude relationship is higher. When the number of changes is three, the selection ratio is “change pattern of“ blue → yellow → green → red ”<“ change of blue → green → red → rainbow ”according to the value of SR5 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to the rainbow color is selected is higher so as to have the magnitude relationship of “pattern”.

  When the number of changes is one, the out-of-time change pattern determination table of FIG. The data is set such that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to yellow is selected is higher in order to have the magnitude relationship of “the change pattern of green”. In addition, when the number of changes is two, the selection ratio is “blue → yellow → green change pattern”> “blue → green → red change pattern” according to the value of SR5 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that the rate at which the change pattern that finally changes to green is selected so as to have a magnitude relationship is higher. In addition, in the case of detachment, it is not provided in the change pattern that changes three times.

  When the display result of the variable display targeted for the timer change effect becomes the big hit display result due to the setting of the data in FIGS. 35 (A) and (B), the final change is made as compared with the out display result. The rate at which the color of the ball image 911 becomes a color with a high hit expectation is high. Therefore, the type of color of the ball image 911 finally changed can increase the player's expectation for the jackpot.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a change timing determination table. In the change timing determination table, the change timing of the ball image 911 according to the number of changes is determined. In the change timing determination table of FIG. 36, when the timer change effect execution time is 10 seconds and the number of changes is one, the change timing (the timer display value at the time of change) by the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set such that “7:00” and “2:00” are determined in a ratio of 1: 1. In addition, when the timer change effect execution time is 15 seconds and the number of changes is one, “10:00” is used as the change timing (timer display value at the time of change) according to the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set so that “5:00” and “5:00” are determined in a ratio of 1: 1.

  In addition, when the timer change effect execution time is 15 seconds and the number of changes is two, the first time “as the change timing (timer display value at the time of change)” is determined by the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is determined so that the timing of 10:00 ”, the second time“ 5:00 ”and the first time“ 13:00 ”and the second time“ 7:00 ”are determined at a ratio of 1: 1. It is set. In addition, when the timer change effect execution time is 20 seconds and the number of changes is two, the first time is "as the change timing (timer display value at the time of change)" by the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is determined so that the timing of 15:00, the second time "10:00" and the first time "13:00" and the second time "7:00" are determined at a 1: 1 ratio. It is set.

  In addition, when the timer change effect execution time is 20 seconds and the number of changes is 3, the first time is "as the change timing (timer display value at the time of change)" by the value of SR6 extracted at a predetermined timing. "15:00", the second time "10:00", the third time "5:00" and the first time "13:00", the second time "7:00", the third time "2:00" The data is set such that the timing of “1” is determined in a 1: 1 ratio.

  When the timer change presentation actual time and the number of changes are determined by the setting of the data in FIG. 36, it is possible to determine any one of a plurality of change timings as the change timing. Further, since a plurality of change timings are provided as described above, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timing at which the ball image 911 as the suggestion display 910 changes.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process (S616) in an effect symbol variation start process for timer change effect. In FIG. 37, among the processes relating to the setting of various effects included in the effect setting process in the effect symbol variation start process, the process related to the setting of the timer change effect is shown. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 performs the following process to determine various effects to be executed in the timer change effect.

  First, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display to be executed this time is the fluctuation pattern specifying super reach based on the fluctuation pattern command received at the time of the current fluctuation (S901). The received variation pattern command is stored in a command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 103 and determines whether or not the super reach variation pattern is stored depending on whether or not the super reach variation pattern command is stored in the region indicating the variation display to be executed this time. judge. If it is not the change pattern of the super reach, it moves to processing of S908. If it is a variation pattern of super reach, the value of SR2 is extracted, and whether the display result of the present variation display is a big hit or not using the extracted random number value and the timer change presentation execution determination table shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute the timer change effect is determined (S902). Whether the display result of the current fluctuation display is a big hit or not is judged by the display result command or the like received when the current fluctuation display is executed whether the display result of the fluctuation display executed this time is a big hit .

  In S903, based on the determination result in S902, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the timer change effect is performed (S903). If it is not determined to execute the timer change effect, the process proceeds to S908. If it is determined to execute the timer change presentation, the value of SR3 is extracted in S904, and the timer change presentation execution time (timer change presentation based on the extracted random number value and the timer change presentation execution time determination table shown in FIG. Determine the number of seconds to run Next, in S905, the value of SR4 is extracted, and the number (number of changes) of changing the color of the ball image 911 during the timer change effect is determined based on the extracted random number and the change number determination table shown in FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S 906, SR 5 is extracted, and the ball image is displayed depending on whether the display result of the current variable display is a big hit or not (disapproval) based on the extracted random value and the change pattern determination table shown in FIG. A color change pattern of 911 is determined (S906). Next, in S907, the value of SR6 is extracted, and the change timing when the color of the ball image 911 changes in the timer change effect is determined based on the extracted random value and the change timing determination table shown in FIG. 36 (S907). Since the color of the ball image 911 changes when the timer display 920 reaches a specific display value, the change timing also determines the timer display value at the time of the change.

Next, in S908, in addition to the timer change effect, the other effect to be executed during the fluctuation display of this time is determined, and the determined effect is set to be executed. In the effect setting process, data for executing the determined effect is stored in the RAM 102. The effect set in the effect setting process is selected as a effect control pattern, and based on the effect control pattern, in the effect symbol variation processing of S802, it is executed during the variation display of the effect symbol.
[Modification of timer change production]
A timer change effect may be executed on the hold indication H on which the hold change effect is performed. For example, the color of the hold indication H is changed from blue to yellow in the normal mode in the hold change effect. Then, when the changed hold display H is displayed as the active display AH in the active display area AHA, the color of the active display AH may be further changed by the timer change effect.

  In such a case, the final color of the predetermined color is determined first depending on whether or not the start winning combination occurs, and the color of the hold display H changes halfway until the hold change effect In the timer change effect, the color of the active display AH may be controlled to change to the final color. In addition, the effect executed in the pre-read effect may be an effect completely unrelated to the effect using the timer display 920, or may be an effect that suggests that the effect using the timer display 920 is to be executed. For example, as an effect completely unrelated to the effect using the timer display 920, a predetermined character is made to appear, and the character performs a predetermined action such as hitting a hold indication H for which a hold change is performed. An effect may be considered such that the color of the hold indication H changes. Further, as an effect that suggests that the effect using the timer display 920 is executed, the display mode of the hold display H is changed to the preparation hold described as “during timer preparation”, and the fluctuation display for the change hold When is performed, the timer change effect may be performed so that the timer display 920 is displayed. In this way, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the execution of the timer change effect from the stage of the hold display H. Note that preparation suspension may not always be performed at the start of the change, and may not be performed. In addition, in the preparation suspension, the timer display 920 may be displayed (such as displaying a timer but not counting down) or not displaying it.

  As an effect for changing the active display AH, an active change effect different from the timer change effect may be executed. As the active change effect, for example, the display mode (for example, color) of the active display AH may be changed by an operation effect which causes the character to emit a beam to the active display AH. Such active change presentation may be performed either before or during SP reach. In such a case, the presentation period may be different between the active change presentation before the SP reach and the active change presentation during the SP reach. For example, the presentation period of the active change presentation may be long before the SP reach, and the presentation period of the active change presentation may be short during the SP reach. In this way, during the SP reach effect, the active change effect is executed in a short time, so the execution of the SP reach effect is not inhibited by the active change effect. Therefore, it is prevented that the effect of the SP reach effect is impaired, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, active change production during SP reach is to be executed in the time until the production of the final false negative about the fluctuation display (for example, the cut-in production of the final stage of reach where it is known later whether it is a big hit etc.) desirable.

  In addition, with regard to the active change effect during the SP reach, instead of shortening the effect period, the display of the active change effect is reduced, and even if the effect itself of the active change effect is made plain as compared to before the SP reach. Good. For example, before SP reach, a flashy effect is performed on the screen of effect display device 9 or features are operated, but if SP reach is performed, a simpler effect than before SP reach is performed. Good.

  Further, the active change effect and the timer change effect may be executable. In such a case, when the timer change effect is performed, the execution of the active change effect may be prohibited. Conversely, when the active change effect is executed, the execution of the timer change effect may be prohibited. In this way, it is possible to prevent the effects from becoming complicated and from being determined which player should pay attention to. In addition, as long as the active change effect and the timer change effect do not overlap, two effects may be performed during one variation display.

  The timer change presentation may be executed during the SP reach presentation. In such a case, the execution time of the timer change effect may be made different between before the start of the SP reach and during the SP reach. For example, the execution period of the timer change effect during the SP reach may be made shorter than the execution period before the SP reach. In this way, during the SP reach effect, since the timer change effect is executed in a short time, the execution of the SP reach effect is not inhibited by the timer change effect. Therefore, it is prevented that the effect of the SP reach effect is impaired, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The timer change presentation may be performed before reaching the reach, and the timer change presentation may not be performed after the reach. In this way, it is possible to concentrate the player on the effects after reaching.

  The timer change effect may be performed a plurality of times. For example, the color of the active display AH may be changed when the first timer change effect is executed, and the indication display 910 or the timer display 920 may be once erased. After that, the timer change effect may be executed again, and the color of the active display AH may be changed by the timer change effect.

  As shown in FIG. 34, as the execution time of the timer change effect increases, the rate at which the number of times of change is determined increases. And when the execution time of the timer change effect is short, there is also a case where it does not change (the number of times of change is zero). However, the active display AH may change whenever the timer change effect is executed. Moreover, even if it is determined to be a long time as the execution time of the timer change effect, there may be provided a case where the number of times of change is small or a case where it does not change.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the case where the number of changes is one, there is no pattern that changes to red with a high expectation of big hit. However, if the number of changes is small, a pattern having a high hit probability may be provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 35B, in the case of detachment, a pattern changing three times was not provided, but a pattern changing three times may be provided even when the display result becomes detachment.

  The change timing determination table as shown in FIG. 36 may be different between the case of the big hit and the case of the change. For example, the change timing may be different depending on whether the display result of the variable display is the big hit display result or the off display result. In addition, a change timing (for example, change with the remaining “7: 77”, etc.) may be provided which is determined only when the big hit display result is obtained.

  The case where the timer change effect is executed is shown in any of the first to fourth super reach shown in FIG. However, the timer change presentation may be performed only for a specific super reach. For example, the timer change presentation may be performed only in the fourth super reach with a high hit probability.

  The timer display 920 has been described in which the digital display is counted down with time. However, the timer display 920 may count up the numbers with time, and the effect may be executed when the predetermined time is reached. Moreover, it does not display numerically as a period display indicating time lapse, but displays an hourglass image indicating time lapse (shows time by remaining sand of hourglass), or a gauge image indicating time lapse Any effect may be used as long as it is an effect that changes information that can indicate the end timing of a predetermined period with the passage of time, such as what is displayed using (indicating time by increasing or decreasing a gauge) .

  When timer change presentation is performed, the case where the number of seconds at the time of start of timer display 920 differs is shown. However, regarding the display mode of the timer display 920 being different, the number of seconds displayed is not different, but the size of the timer display 920 is different, the color of the timer display 920 is different, the form of the timer display 920 Or the like) may be different, or a combination thereof.

  As shown in FIGS. 30E and 30F, the ball image 911 as the suggestion display 910 directly hits the active display AH and the case where the active display AH changes. However, after the ball image 911 thrown from the character is once enlarged and displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9, effects such as hitting (acting) the active display AH may be executed. Further, when the ball image 911 thrown from the character hits the active display AH, the display mode of the active display may be further changed. For example, when the yellow ball image 911 hits the active display AH, the display mode of the active display AH may be further changed to red.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the data is set so that the jackpot expectation degree is higher as the execution time of the timer change effect is longer. However, the execution period of the timer change effect may be constant regardless of the jackpot expectation (for example, always 10 seconds). In such a case, the color of the frame of the timer display 920 may be changed according to the jackpot expectation, or the jackpot expectation may be different in portions other than the numerals.

  A plurality of characters may be provided as the indication indication 910 of FIG. Then, the number of times the ball image changes and the number of seconds on the timer display 920 may be different depending on the timer change effect depending on the difference in the characters.

  The following control may be performed on the timer display 920 displayed during the timer change effect. For example, an effect of stopping the countdown of the timer display 920 for several seconds while the timer change effect is being performed (hereinafter, referred to as a freeze effect) may be performed. After the freeze effect, the timer display 920 may count down again. Further, the degree of expectation of the big hit may be different between the case of passing the freeze effect and the case of not passing the freeze effect.

  The following control may be performed on the timer display 920 displayed during the timer change effect. For example, a special pattern may be provided in which the value of the timer display 920 is increased when the timer display 920 executed in the timer change effect becomes a value indicating 0 seconds. Also, such a special pattern may be executed a plurality of times. Also, each time the special pattern is executed, the color of the ball image 911 may be changed by the timer change effect.

  The position at which the timer change presentation is performed may be changed according to the type of other presentation being performed during the variable display. For example, when the first effect is performed, the timer change effect is performed at the upper right position of the effect display device 9, and when the second effect is performed, the lower left of the effect display device 9 The timer change presentation may be performed at the position. Further, instead of changing the position at which the timer change effect is executed depending on the type of effect, the size of the suggestion display 910 displayed as the timer change effect may be changed.

  The display mode of the timer display 920 in the timer change effect may be changed until it becomes 0 seconds. For example, the countdown may be started from 10 seconds, and the color of the number or frame of the timer display 920 may be changed at 7 seconds of the change timing. Further, the color at this time may correspond to the color of the change of the ball image 911.

  As shown in FIG. 30, as the timer change effect, an effect is shown in which the character changes the one ball image 911 by making a beanbag. A plurality of such ball images 911 may be displayed instead of one. Further, at least one ball image 911 of the plurality of ball images 911 may be changed during execution of the timer change effect. For example, when a character uses two ball images 911 to make a move, one of the ball images 911 is changed from blue to green while the other ball image 911 is changed from blue to red during the timer change effect. It is also good. Then, when the timer display 920 reaches 0 seconds, the character may throw one of these ball images 911 toward the active display AH. In this way, since it is not known what display mode the display mode of the active display AH will eventually become, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the timer change effect. In addition, when the jackpot expectation is high, the number of ball images 911 displayed in the timer change effect may be increased. In addition, after the display mode of the active display AH is changed by the first ball image 911, the character throws the second ball image 911 toward the active display AH again, thereby achieving a display mode with higher expectation. And the active display AH may be changed.

Although a pachinko machine has been exemplified as a gaming machine, various settings shown in the above-described embodiment are such that medals are inserted, a predetermined bet number is set, and a plurality of types of settings are made according to the operation of an operation lever by a player. A slot in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are turned and the symbols on the display means are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button. It is also possible to apply to a machine (slot machine). Specifically, in the display device such as the effect display device provided in the slot machine, the timer change effect may be executed. In the case of executing the timer change effect in the slot machine, the hold display may be displayed when the predetermined lottery target combination is won. Then, when the player moves the hold display to the active display area in the next game and wins an advantageous state (for example, an AT notifying an operation procedure advantageous for the player) which is advantageous for the player in the game, the timer It is sufficient to execute the change presentation. Further, in such a case, the timer change effect may be performed together with the delay control for delaying the progress of the game. The timer display may be displayed for a predetermined period during delay control, and the display mode of the active display may be changed based on the fact that the timer display has become 0 seconds.
[Other variations of active hold change production]
In the active hold change effect shown in FIG. 22, it is assumed that the player can select the effect start position from among positions A to C which are predetermined. However, the player may freely select the position by operating the operation means.

  The active hold change effect shown in FIG. 22 is an effect associated with a change in active display. However, such an effect may be diverted to an on-hold change effect relating to a change in the on-hold display. Specifically, referring to FIG. 22, character 930 does not throw the ball toward active display AH, but is directed to throw the ball toward any hold display H. Although it is optional which target H is to be displayed and at which timing the effect is started, for example, they are determined using the effect execution timing determination table (FIG. 19) used for control of the pending change effect. It is also good. However, depending on the location of the hold indication H, the distances to the positions A to C will differ. In order to make the distance relation between the hold display and the positions A to C common even when any hold display H is targeted, the positions A to H are selected according to the position of the target hold display H. The position of C may be shifted.

  In the active hold change effect shown in FIG. 22, when the success pattern is reached, the color of the active display is changed to the “final color”, or the big hit expectation level is the lowest first color (blue Either) However, instead of such first stage color, it may be made to be the second stage color (green), or it may be made to be either the first stage or second stage color. However, when the “final color” is originally determined to be the first stage color, it is necessary to limit the second stage color so as not to be achieved.

The timer change effect shown in FIG. 30 is a second modification of the active hold change effect. However, such an effect may be diverted to an on-hold change effect relating to a change in the on-hold display. Specifically, the timer change effect using the timer display 920 of FIG. 30 may be performed on the hold display H. That is, the timer change effect may be executed as the prefetch effect. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display performed before the timer change presentation is executed is the fluctuation time in which the timer change presentation can be performed, and the fluctuation time in which the timer change presentation can be executed If so, it is sufficient to execute the timer change effect. Then, not the active display AH but the pending display H may be changed by the timer change effect.
[Adoption of pattern of specific effect (hold change effect and active hold change effect)]
In this embodiment, the ball thrown toward the hold display or the active display is always an effect of hitting the target hold display or the active display. However, it may be set so that an effect may be generated such that the thrown ball does not collide with the target display or the active display. For example, it may be considered to replace the failure pattern in which the ball is passed without being hit by the target display or the active display, or to add such a failure pattern. Be

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may adopt only one of the on-hold change effect and the on-hold change effect described above as the specific effect, or may adopt both of them. Further, it is conceivable that at least one (or all) of all the effects including the modification described so far is adopted as the content of the on-hold change effect. Similarly, as the content of the active hold change presentation, it is considered that at least one (or all) of all the presentation including the modification described above is adopted.
[Other modifications]
In the embodiment described above, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and advantageous states advantageous to the player may include high probability state (probability state), short time state, and other advantageous states such as high base state.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as substrates on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, one circuit for controlling the effect device is provided. It may be mounted on a substrate. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) equipped with a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 etc. and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are installed. Two substrates with the second effect control substrate may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 100, but the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, as shown in FIG. 3). Sound control / control board with sound output board 70, lamp driver board 35, etc., or function by the circuit mounted on sound output board 70 and function by the circuit mounted on lamp driver board 35) May be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, or the control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. According to the control, the microcomputer 100 executes control relating to voice control and lamp control, and further changes the received command as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. It may be sent to the Even in that case, the sound control board 100 and the lamp driver are similar to the display control according to the play control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate. In the case of such a configuration, the various types of determination made by the effect control microcomputer 100 in the embodiment described above may be similarly made to be performed by the effect control microcomputer 100, or sound output Control means such as a microcomputer mounted on the substrate 70, the lamp driver substrate 35, or the sound / lamp substrate may be used.

  In the embodiment described above, one fluctuation pattern command is used to start fluctuation in order to notify the microcomputer for effect control of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of the pseudo sequence. In the example shown in the figure, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer is the first command before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect (so-called second if it does not reach) Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (so-called second stop if it does not reach) Command) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in the variable display on the basis of the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer is notified of the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer is made to select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command. As described above, in the configuration in which the variation pattern is notified to the effect control microcomputer by two commands, the determination result of the display result by the effect process at the time of winning in the second command after transmitting the first command, Alternatively, pre-reading determination information such as the variation pattern type may be transmitted, and effects of pre-reading notice may be executed based on the reception of the second command. Here, the pseudo ream is an effect display that makes it appear that a plurality of fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of suspension memories are being performed continuously, although the fluctuation is originally one time corresponding to one suspension memory. It is an abbreviation showing continuous fluctuation. In addition, the term “slip” means effect display in which the symbol is slipped from the predicted stop position immediately before the stop of the symbol in the variable display.

  The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the embodiments described above are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided by a removable recording medium to a computer device or the like, and a storage device such as a computer device or the like in advance. It does not matter if it is distributed by pre-installing it in. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter. Also, the embodiment of the game is not limited to one that is executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but may be executed by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

  Although the gaming machine which pays out the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize has been described as this embodiment, the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is paid to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize. You may employ the enclosure type game machine which adds a game point (score), without taking out. The enclosed type game machine is provided with a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls as an example of a game medium in the game machine, and a storage unit for storing the game points is provided according to the ball lending operation. The gaming points are added to the storage unit, the gaming points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the firing operation of the ball, and the gaming points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, a case is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed, but the variation display is limited to such an aspect I can not. For example, the symbol displayed in a variable manner and the symbol displayed in a derived manner do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed in a variable manner may be derived and displayed. In addition, it is not necessary to change and display a plurality of types of symbols, and the change display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be finally derived and displayed, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the “ratio (proportion, probability)”, a predetermined value exceeding 0% is described as a specific example. However, 0% may be used as the “proportion (proportion, probability)”. For example, in the case where "the occurrence rate of one is higher than the occurrence rate of the other" by comparing the occurrence rate of the predetermined gaming state 1 with the occurrence rate of the other gaming state 2 in the predetermined gaming period, Also includes the case where the rate of occurrence of one game state is 0%.

  In the embodiment described above, after the variable display result is derived and displayed when it is determined that the display result of the variable display is determined to be the big change big hit, it is unconditionally controlled to the high change state after the big hit gaming state ends. An example of probability change state control is shown. However, not limited to this, the probability change determination device is controlled to be a probability change state when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 20 A type of probability change state control may be performed.

  It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

As the gaming machine according to the present invention, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of performing variable display (variable display etc.) and controlling in an advantageous state (big hit gaming state etc.) for the player. And so on),
Predetermined display means (hold display area 18c, active display area AHA, etc.) capable of displaying predetermined display (hold display, active display, etc.) corresponding to the variable display;
As shown in FIGS. 15 (a), (b) and (c), the character 930 sets the color ball 931 to the hold display TH as shown in FIGS. 15 (a), (b) and (c). Specific effect execution means (pending display area 18c, active display area AHA, etc.) capable of executing the color ball 931 colliding with the pending display TH and changing the color of the pending display TH etc.
Suggestion display execution means that can execute at least a suggestion that suggests an expectation that would be advantageous to the player by changing the display mode in a plurality of steps (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, meter MT Effect control CPU 90120 etc.) that can execute the display of
Change effect executing means capable of changing the change effect (meter effect) capable of changing the display mode of the indication display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, an operation image of the movable effect member 9060, an effect image such as an oval Effect that displays the effect of changing the display mode of the meter MT toward the upper limit of the meter (level 4 (MAX)) effect that changes the display mode of the meter toward the lower limit of the meter, type and number of items Effect control CPU that can execute effects such as changing effects, characters (size, color, number, etc.), effects that increase or decrease numbers, etc.
During the variable display, the special display (for example, normal reach production, reach development possibility production, etc. production that enjoys a sense of expectation for the gaming machine to be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to the player) Suggestion display control means capable of executing display control to be redisplayed according to the execution of the change presentation after being erased once at the start of the execution of the display (for example, as shown in FIG. 67 to FIG. 69) The effect control CPU 90120 is capable of executing effects such as redisplaying the meter MT etc. according to the fact that the movable effect member 9060 is operated to develop into a super reach at the start of the execution of the availability effect, etc. Etc) and,
The specific effect execution means is
The first pattern (the success pattern in FIGS. 15 (a), (b), (c), etc.) for starting the display of the action display and changing the display mode of the predetermined display after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the display of the action display A second pattern (such as a failure pattern in FIGS. 15 (a), (b) and (d)) that does not change the display mode of the predetermined display after a predetermined period has elapsed.
Deceleration control to reduce the speed of the action display with respect to the target predetermined display at a common timing in the predetermined period of the first pattern and the second pattern (as shown in FIG. 15B, success and failure) There are gaming machines that can execute deceleration of the ball speed etc. at the same timing as time.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the action display. In addition, in the gaming machine, it is possible to suppress the suggestion display from disturbing the special effect.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the indication may be displayed during the execution of the specific effect, or may not be displayed during the execution of the specific effect. Further, the presence or absence of indication of indication and the form of indication may be selected according to the content of the specific effect. Further, the suggested effect may be temporarily erased when the specific effect starts, and may be redisplayed according to the execution of the specific effect. Furthermore, the above-mentioned gaming machine may have a suggestion display dedicated to the first pattern or a suggestion display dedicated to the second pattern as the suggestion display.

  More specifically, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, from the point of further improving the rendering effect of the specific rendering, the suggestion display is displayed before the execution of the specific rendering, and is executed according to the degree of expectation suggested by the suggestion The selection ratio between the first pattern and the second pattern in the specific effect may be changed. In addition, from the point of suppressing the dispersion of the player's attention and the point of suppressing the suggestion display from disturbing the specific effect, the indication may not be displayed during the execution of the specific effect. The image may be temporarily erased when the specific effect starts, and may be displayed again according to the execution of the specific effect.

Furthermore, as an example of a gaming machine that can suppress the suggestion display from disturbing the special effect,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901 etc.),
Suggestion display execution means that can execute at least a suggestion that suggests an expectation that would be advantageous to the player by changing the display mode in a plurality of steps (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, meter MT Effect control CPU 90120 etc.) that can execute the display of
Change effect executing means capable of changing the change effect (meter effect) capable of changing the display mode of the indication display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, an operation image of the movable effect member 9060, an effect image such as an oval Effect that displays the effect of changing the display mode of the meter MT toward the upper limit of the meter (level 4 (MAX)) effect that changes the display mode of the meter toward the lower limit of the meter, type and number of items Effect control CPU that can execute effects such as changing effects, characters (size, color, number, etc.), effects that increase or decrease numbers, etc.
The suggestion display being executed during the variable display is once erased upon the start of the execution of the special effect (for example, normal reach effect, reach development possibility effect), and then it is re-executed according to the execution of the change effect. Suggestion display control means capable of executing display control to be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 69, the meter MT etc. is temporarily erased at the start of execution of the reach development availability effect, and then the movable effect member 9060 operates) A game machine characterized by including an effect control CPU 90120 or the like) capable of executing effects such as redisplaying of the meter MT etc. in response to the development to the super reach. Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 38 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to another embodiment, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board 902 which constitutes a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. In the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902, a first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B is composed of, for example, LEDs of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. A special symbol that is identification information of a type is variably displayed. For example, each of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B can change a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. indicate.

  The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B are made up of numerals indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, with different combinations of what is turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 904B is also the "second special view" Say.

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, an image display device 905 capable of executing variable display (also referred to as "variation display") of a decorative symbol is provided. The image display device 905 is, for example, an LCD or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. The display area of the image display device 905 corresponds to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A in the special figure game and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B. For example, in the decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, decorative symbols which are plural types of identification information capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 905, decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right" are arranged. Then, in the special drawing game, one of the first special figure fluctuation in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special figure fluctuation in the second special symbol display device 904B is started. In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R, variation of the decorative symbols is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special view game, the display symbols 905L, 905C, 905R on the left, middle, and right in the image display device 905 are displayed. The finalized decorative pattern that is the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of image display device 905, the special figure game using the first special figure in first special symbol display device 904A, or the second special figure in second special symbol display device 904B. In synchronization with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of kinds of decorative symbols that can be identified respectively is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol to be a variable display result is derived and displayed. Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means stopping display of identification information such as a decorative symbol and the like, and ending variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed, the change speed of the decorative symbol is "0", and the decorative symbol is displayed. For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed in a definite manner, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the decorative pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 905H, a holding storage display for specifying the number of holdings of the variable display corresponding to the special view game is performed. Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 906A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 906B when the variable display corresponding to the special view game is held. It occurs based on the starting winnings by doing. That is, although the start condition for executing the variable display game such as the special view game and the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, the variable display game based on the start condition established earlier is being executed and the pachinko gaming machine 901 When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to being controlled to the jackpot gaming state or the like, suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is performed.

  For example, when the start condition of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize where the gaming ball passes the first start prize opening (1) If the first start condition for starting the special view game using the first special view based on the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, the number of first special view reservation memories is incremented by 1, and the first special view is used The execution of the special figure game that had been In addition, when the start condition of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special special symbol display device 904B is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize where the game ball passes the second start winning opening If the second start condition for starting the special view game using the second special view based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the number of second special view reservation memories is incremented by 1, and the second special view The execution of the special drawing game used is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of first special figure holding memories is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started At the same time, the number of the second special view reservation storage number is decremented by one.

  The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular to some of these There are also cases.

  Along with or in place of the start winning storage display area 905H, a display may be provided to display the number of stored special figures. In the example shown in FIG. 38, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B together with the start winning combination memory display area 905H, the first to display the number of special drawing reservations in an identifiable manner. A hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided. The first hold indicator 9025A displays the first special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The second hold indicator 9025B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B is configured to include, for example, the number of LEDs corresponding to the upper limit value in each of the first special view reserve storage number and the second special view reserve storage number .

  In the vicinity of the predetermined edge in the display area of the image display device 905, a movable effect member 9060 is provided. The movable effect member 9060 is tilted toward the left side of FIG. 38 with the lower end as a fulcrum toward the image display device 905 side by the rotational drive of the movable effect member motor 9061 shown in FIG. The effect model is configured to advance to the front of the display area. That is, the movable effect member 9060 can be changed between the non-tilting state extending in the vertical direction and the above-described tilting state by rotational driving of the movable effect member motor 9061 shown in FIG.

  Under the image display device 905, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The regular winning ball device 906A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906B has a pair of movable winglets that changes between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for an ordinary electric character shown in FIG. 39. To form a second starting winning opening.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening by the movable wing piece being in the vertical position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is off. It becomes. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary electric character is in the on state, whereby the game ball is released into the second starting winning hole. It becomes a state. In addition, even when the variable ball device 906B is in the closed state, the game ball can enter the second start winning port, but the possibility of the game ball entering is lower than that in the open state. It may be configured as follows. As described above, the game area is provided with the normally variable winning ball device 906B that changes between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the game ball can not enter or is difficult to enter.

  The game ball entering the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. A predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 9022A, and the first start if the number of first special view holding memories is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit. The condition is met. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 9022B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the second special view reserve storage number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit, the second start The condition is met.

  The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 9022A, and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 9022B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 901 may directly pay out the gaming balls to be the winning balls, or may give a score corresponding to the number of gaming balls to be the winning balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 906A and the normal variable winning ball device 906B. The special variable winning prize ball device 907 includes a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 39, and a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door is in the OFF state, the special winning opening door closes the large winning opening, and the gaming ball can not pass through the special winning opening . On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, when the solenoid 9082 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the game ball easily passes the big winning mouth Do. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state advantageous for the player to easily pass the game ball and a closed state disadvantageous to the player because the game ball can not pass. In place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass through the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball hardly passes through the big winning opening may be provided.

  The game ball having passed through the special winning opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. A predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the gaming balls by the count switch 9023. Thus, when the game ball passes through the special winning opening that has become open in the special variable winning ball device 907, for example, when the gaming ball passes other winning openings such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, the gaming ball can enter the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning opening is closed or partially closed in the special variable winning ball device 907, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing the game ball through the special winning opening, making the game A second condition that is disadvantageous to the

  At a predetermined position of the game board 902, a normal symbol display 9020 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 9020 is composed of LEDs or the like of 7 segments or dot matrix similarly to the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and multiple types of identification different from the special symbol It displays the normal pattern which is information variably. Such variable display of ordinary symbols is referred to as "common-play game". Above the normal symbol display 9020, a general drawing reserve display 9025C is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general drawing retention memory number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 9041.

  On the surface of the game board 902, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball, and a large number of obstacle nails are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number of gaming balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that the gaming ball having entered one of the general winning openings is detected by the predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  Speakers 908 L and 908 R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and further, a gaming effect lamp 909 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be disposed around each structure in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 901. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 903 is provided a striking operation handle that is operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball in accordance with the amount of operation by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area, the gaming ball paid out as a winning ball and the gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device. A plate is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 903, a lower tray is provided which holds excess balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  On the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011, an effect control board 9012, an audio control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 as shown in FIG. 39 are mounted. In addition, a relay board 9015 or the like for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 9011 and the effect control board 9012 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 901. In addition, various substrates such as, for example, a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate, a touch sensor substrate and the like are disposed on the back of the gaming board 902 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board consisting of a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 9011 performs variable control of the first special figure and the second special figure by performing on / off control of each LED constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. The function to control the variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the normal symbol display 9020 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020, etc. Have.

  On the main board 9011, for example, a game control microcomputer 90100, a switch circuit 90110, a solenoid circuit 90111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 90110 takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the signals to the game control microcomputer 90100. The solenoid circuit 90111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 90100 to the solenoid 9081 for the ordinary motorized part and the solenoid 9082 for the special winning opening door.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R. And, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric parts for presentation such as the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 9012 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 905, all or part of the audio output operation from the speakers 908L, 908R, all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations in the game effect lamp 909 or the decorative LED. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for effect, such as the unit, to perform a predetermined effect operation.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012. The sound control board 9013 causes the speakers 908L and 908R to output a sound based on a command from the effect control board 9012 or control data. The processing circuit etc. which perform the audio | voice signal processing for this are mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 9012, the game effect lamp 909, the decorative LED, etc. The lamp driver circuit etc. which perform the lighting / light-extinguishing drive in are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the main substrate 9011 is connected with wirings for transmitting detection signals from various switches, such as a gate switch 9021, a start port switch, and a count switch 9023. The various switches may be of any type as long as they can detect gaming balls as gaming media, such as those called "sensors". Further, the main substrate 9011 is connected with a wire for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 904A, the second special symbol display device 904B, the normal symbol display device 9020 and the like.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 905, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 908L and 908R, a game effect lamp 909 And a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE, and the second byte indicates EXT. The head bit of the MODE data may be set in advance so that it always becomes "1" and the head bit of the EXT data becomes "0".

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM 90101 for storing programs for game control, fixed data, etc., and a RAM 90102 for providing a work area for game control A CPU 90103 that executes a game control program to perform control operations; a random number circuit 90104 that independently updates numerical data indicating random numbers; and an I / O 90105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 90103 executes a program read from the ROM 90101 to execute processing for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 90103 reads fixed data from the ROM 90101, a fluctuation data write operation in which the CPU 90103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 90102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 90102 by the CPU 90103 Data reading operation to read out the data, a reception operation in which the CPU 90103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105, and the CPU 90103 to the outside of the game control microcomputer 90100 via the I / O 90105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 90100 may have at least the RAM 90102 in addition to the CPU 90103, and the ROM 90101, the random number circuit 90104, the I / O 90105, etc. may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 90100, for example, numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the progress of the game is countably updated by the random number circuit 90104 or the like. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random numbers may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 90104 or the like, or may be updated by software when the CPU 90103 of the game control microcomputer 90100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 in the game control microcomputer 90100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 90102, and the CPU 90103 The stored value may be updated regularly or irregularly to update the random number value.

  The ROM 90101 provided in the game control microcomputer 90100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used to control the progress of the game, in addition to the program for game control. For example, the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. The ROM 90101 is also configured with table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for transmitting control signals serving as various control commands from the main substrate 9011 by the CPU 90103, and a fluctuation pattern table storing plural kinds of fluctuation patterns. Table data etc. are stored. Various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 is temporarily stored in a RAM 90102 of the microcomputer 90100 for game control, in a rewritable manner.

  The effect control board 9012 includes an effect control CPU 90120 that performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 that stores effect control programs, fixed data, etc., a RAM 90122 that provides a work area for effect control CPU 90120, and an image display device A display control unit 90123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 905, a random number circuit 90124 that updates numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the effect control CPU 90120, and an I / O 90125 And is mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 9012, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 90121 to execute processing for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 90121, a variation data write operation in which the effect control CPU 90120 writes various change data in the RAM 90122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 90120 in the RAM 90122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive input of various signals from outside of the production control board 9012 via the I / O 90125 for the production control CPU 90120, I / O for the production control CPU 90120 A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 via O 90125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012. The effect control board 9012 includes a wire for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 905, a wire for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 9013, Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 9014 is connected. Furthermore, the effect control board 9012 is also connected with a wire for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 9016 for driving the movable effect member motor 9061 for operating the movable effect member 9060. .

  In the effect control board 9012, for example, the random number circuit 90124 or the like counts up numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  In the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 39, besides the program for effect control, various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation are stored. For example, in the ROM 90121, a plurality of determination tables prepared to make various determinations, determinations, and settings by the effect control CPU 90120, table data forming the determination tables, pattern data forming the various effect control patterns, etc. It is memorized. The RAM 90122 mounted on the effect control board 9012 stores various data used to control the effect operation.

  The display control unit 90123 mounted on the effect control board 9012 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 905 based on the display control instruction from the effect control CPU 90120 and the like. For example, the display control unit 90123 performs control for executing the variable display of the decorative symbol and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 or the like. As an example, the display control unit 90123 may be equipped with a VDP, a CGROM, a VRAM, an LCD drive circuit, and the like. Note that VDP may be a GPU, GCL, or a microprocessor for image processing more generally referred to as a DSP. The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or any of non-volatile recording media such as a magnetic memory and an optical memory. It may be configured.

  The I / O 90125 mounted on the effect control board 9012 has, for example, an input port for fetching an effect control command transmitted from the main board 9011 or the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 9012 And including. For example, an output port of the I / O 90125 outputs a video signal transmitted to the image display device 905, an instruction transmitted to the audio control board 9013, an instruction transmitted to the lamp control board 9014, and the like. .

  In pachinko gaming machine 901, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be provided based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a firing motor provided in a predetermined bat firing device based on the fact that a bat operating handle installed at the lower right of a front surface of a case in pachinko gaming machine 901 has been operated by a player in a predetermined manner. The game ball as a game medium is fired toward the game area by the game player, etc. When the gaming ball having flowed down the gaming area passes the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the first starting is performed because the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. 39, etc. The condition is met. Thereafter, based on the establishment of the first start condition, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A starts Be done.

  Also, when the gaming ball passes the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the second starting condition is satisfied because the gaming ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG. 39, etc. Do. Thereafter, based on the establishment of the second start condition, for example, due to the end of the previous special view game or the big hit gaming state, the special view game using the second special view by the second special special symbol display device 904B is It is started. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 906B is in the closed state as the second state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the gaming ball having passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. 39, a common drawing start condition for executing variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9020 is satisfied. Thereafter, based on the fact that the common drawing start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbols is established, for example, that the previous common drawing game has ended, the common drawing game by the normal symbol display 9020 is started. In this common-play game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time passes, the determined normal symbol as the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol in the common drawing is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "general drawing lost". In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol becoming "per common figure", the open control is performed such that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 906B tilts, and the predetermined time is set. When it passes, closing control is performed to return to the vertical position.

  When the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started, or when the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B is started, It is determined before the variable display result is derived and displayed whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result or the variation pattern is the microcomputer 100 for effect control of the main substrate 9011 shown in FIG. Are transmitted toward the effect control board 9012.

  After the special view game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has passed, a finalized special symbol to be a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, "left", "middle", "right" arranged in the display area of the image display device 905 In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, variable display of decorative symbols different from the special symbols is performed.

  In the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A, or in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B, the finalized variable symbol display result of the special symbol When the special symbol is derived and displayed, a finalized ornamental symbol as a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed in the image display device 905. When the jackpot symbol predetermined as the variable display result of the special symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is "big hit" and is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the specific gaming state advantageous to the player. As the variable display result of the special symbol, the big hit symbol is not derived and displayed, and when the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result is "loss".

  As an example, a special symbol indicating a number of "3" or "7" is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating a symbol of "-" is a lost symbol. In addition, each symbol such as big hit symbol or lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 904A is a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 904B It is good, and a special symbol common to both special figure games may be made to be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol. Moreover, the special symbol of the lighting pattern which has a specific meaning as a number or a symbol is not limited to what makes it a big hit symbol or a lost symbol. It may be

  In the jackpot gaming state, the special winning opening is opened, and the special variable winning ball device 907 is in the first advantageous state for the player. Then, a round game in which the big winning opening is continuously opened is executed in a predetermined period or in a period until a predetermined number of gaming balls enter the big winning opening and a winning ball is generated. In a period other than the execution period of such a round game, the special winning opening is closed, making it difficult or impossible to generate winning balls. When the gaming ball enters the big winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 9023, and a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as a winning ball every time the detection is made. The round game in the jackpot gaming state is repeatedly executed until the predetermined upper limit number is reached.

  When the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type becomes either "non-probability change" or "probability change" is included. For example, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is derived and displayed as the variable symbol result of the special symbol, the jackpot type becomes "non-probability change" and the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is jackpotted when the jackpot is displayed The type is "probable". When the jackpot type becomes "non-probability" or "probability", the upper limit time for making the special variable winning ball device 907 a first state advantageous to the player is relatively long as a round game in the jackpot gaming state A regular opening round is performed, which is time. As a round game in the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot type may be provided in which a short-term opening round in which the upper limit time for setting the special variable winning ball device 907 to the first state is relatively short is executed. The jackpot gaming state in which the normal opening round is executed is also referred to as a first specific gaming state. The jackpot gaming state in which the short-term opening round is executed is also referred to as a second specific gaming state.

  After the jackpot gaming state ends, the probability that the variable display result is a "big hit" may be controlled to be higher than the normal state based on the establishment of the predetermined probability change control condition. The definite change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined fixed change termination condition is satisfied, such as a predetermined number of variable displays being performed or a next big hit gaming state being started. Also, after the big hit gaming state ends, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short time state where it is shorter than the normal state. The time saving state is controlled so as to continue until one of the time saving end conditions is first established among the fact that the variable display of the predetermined number of times has been executed and that the next big hit gaming state is started. . As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-deterministic", after the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes a time saving state. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probable change", after the big hit gaming state ends, the gaming state becomes the definite change state.

  In the positive change state or the short time state, the normal variable winning ball device 906B is changed to the first state and the second state in the advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes the second starting winning opening than the normal state. For example, control to shorten the variation time of the regular symbol in the regular game by the regular symbol display 9020 than in the normal state, or the probability that the variable display result of the regular symbol will be "per diagram" in each regular game Control to improve the movement of the movable wing in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on the result that the variable display result is "per common view" than in the normal state It is sufficient to change the normally variable winning ball device 906B between the first state and the second state in the advantageous change mode by the control of lengthening the control and the control of increasing the number of tilting times more than in the normal state. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. As described above, control for changing the normally variable winning prize ball device 906B between the first state and the second state in the advantageous change mode is referred to as high open control. By being controlled to such a definite change state or a short time state, the time required for the next variable display result to become a "big hit" is shortened, and a special game state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is attained.

  The game balls used as game media in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the record information of the score given corresponding to the number thereof may have a valuable value that can be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize according to the quantity Just do it. Alternatively, the record information of the gaming balls and the scores may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have a valuable value that can be used for playing the game again with the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R provided in the image display device 905, a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A Among the special drawing games using the second special drawing in the second special special symbol display device 904B, variable display of the decorative design is started in response to the start of one of the special drawing games. Then, in a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol in the left, middle and right decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R The variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode.

  Here, with the reach mode, when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes a part of the big hit combination, the variation continues for the decorative symbol not being stopped and displayed yet. Or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative patterns are fluctuating in synchronization while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in part of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R of "left", "middle" and "right", the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined big hit combination are still displayed when stopped. The display mode in which the decorative symbol is fluctuating in the remaining decorative symbol display area which is not stopped and displayed, or all or part of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R Is a display mode in which the decorative design is fluctuating in synchronization while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  Also, in response to the reach mode, the variation speed of the decorative pattern is reduced, a character image different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905, and the display mode of the background image is changed. A rendering operation different from that before reaching the reach mode may be executed by causing the moving picture different from the decoration pattern to be reproduced or displayed, or changing the variable display mode of the decoration pattern. Such a rendering operation as displaying a character image or changing a display mode of a background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image, and changing a variable display mode of a decorative pattern is referred to as reach effect display. In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 905, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 908L and 908R, the lighting operation in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 909, etc. An operation mode different from the above may be included.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns having different operation modes may be prepared in advance. And according to the production | presentation aspect in each reach production | presentation, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" differs. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be the "big hit" can be differentiated depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is executed. For example, reach effects such as normal, super A, and super B may be set in advance. And, when the reach effect of the super reach such as the super A and the super B is executed, the possibility that the variable display result becomes the “big hit” becomes high, compared with the case where the normal reach effect is executed. Further, among the reach effects of the super reach, when a specific reach effect such as the super B is executed, the jackpot expectation level is higher than when the reach effect of the super A is executed.

  The jackpot expectation is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) + (except for big hit time It is calculated by the probability that the effect is executed) × (probability of not making a big hit)}.

  Unlike the reach effect, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, an image display or voice output as a message, and a lighting operation of the game effect lamp 909 or the decoration LED, etc., unlike reach effect during variable display of the decorative symbol Due to the rendering operation different from the display operation of the decorative symbol, for example, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may become a reach mode, or the variable display result may become a "big hit", etc. A notice effect may be performed to notify the player in advance of the degree of advantage of the game executed in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The production operation to be the preview production is the variable display mode of the decorative design after the variable display of the decorative design is started in all of the decorative design display areas 905L, 905C and 905R of "left", "middle" and "right". It is sufficient if it is executed before the reach mode. Moreover, what is performed after the variable display mode of a decorative symbol turns into a reach mode may be included in the preliminary announcement effect which alert | reports that a variable display result may become a "big hit". In this manner, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started to when the finalized special symbol or the fixed decorative symbol is derived as the variable display result. It should be something that can give notice of sex. A plurality of advance notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation in the case of executing such advance notice effects. The effect operation to be the advance effect effect may be any operation that does not cause a change in the variable display time of the special symbol depending on whether or not it is executed.

  Further, the special aspect super reach effect may be set to be executable as the special effect. The special aspect super reach production is a part of or a part of the production aspect of the normal aspect super reach production in a part or all of the period from when the super reach production is started until the finalized decorative symbol to be a variable display result is derived. All of the presentation modes are different. When a special aspect super reach production is performed in a part period from when the super reach production is started until the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the variable display result is derived, the production mode of the super reach production before and after that is the normal aspect It becomes. When the special aspect super reach effect is executed, the variable display result is more likely to be "big hit" than when only the normal aspect super reach effect is executed.

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 63 (B1), the special aspect super reach effect includes an aspect in which a mini character MG such as a whistle or a beckoning cat is displayed together with the character CG and the special mode message SG4. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (B2), the normal mode super reach effect is a mode in which the character CG and the message SG5 of the normal mode are displayed while the mini character MG is not displayed.

  Also, the meter effect may be set to be executable. The meter effect is an effect of displaying a meter as a predetermined display on the image display device 905 and changing the display mode of the meter. Note that the meter may be constantly displayed on the image display device 905 regardless of whether the meter effect is performed. The display mode of the meter is set to five levels of level 0 to level 4 as an example. In the meter effect, the display mode of the meter is level 0 indicating that no meter has accumulated, level 1 indicating that one meter is accumulated, level 2 indicating that two meters are accumulated, and three meters The display mode changes to Level 3 indicating the accumulated state, and to Level 4 indicating the state in which the meter accumulated to MAX.

  In addition, a meter effect is not limited to what the display mode of a meter changes sequentially to the display mode of the level 0-the level 4, ie, the thing which changes toward the upper limit of a meter. For example, the meter effect may be one in which the display mode of the meter changes sequentially to the display mode of level 4 to level 0, that is, one in which it changes toward the lower limit value of the meter.

  Moreover, when the special aspect super reach effect is executed, the display mode of the meter changes to the display mode of level 4 in the meter effect. Also, when the variable display result is "big hit", the special aspect super reach effect is executed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is "loss". That is, when the display mode of the meter is the display mode of level 4, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit".

  When the special aspect super reach effect is executed, the display mode of the meter in the meter effect may be changed to the display mode of a specific level such as level 3 or more. When the display mode of the meter is the display mode of level 3 or more, the possibility of the variable display result becoming a “big hit” may be increased.

  In addition, for example, while displaying a special character image of an aspect informing that a meter effect is to be executed, for example, as a preliminary effect effect informing that there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", for example, A notice effect may be prepared which is executed in a meter change notification mode in which a message image such as “Reserve” is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905. In this embodiment, in the variable display in which the meter effect is performed, the advance effect in the meter change notification mode can be performed. In addition, the production | generation aspect of advance production may be aspects other than the aspect which alert | reports that meter production | presentation is performed. The presentation mode of the preliminary presentation effect may be, for example, a mode that indicates how much the level of the meter should be raised, such as displaying an image such as “LV1UP” on the screen of the image display device 905. In addition, the effect mode of the advance effect effect may be an aspect of notifying that the meter effect is executed by changing a part of the display notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit". .

  Also, the tilt effect may be set to be executable. The tilt effect is an effect image of an aspect in which the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed, for example, a specific character image is displayed and, for example, a message image such as “Retain” is displayed on the It is an effect displayed on the screen.

  Note that the effects such as the advance notice effect and the tilt effect are not limited to those by displaying the image on the screen of the image display device 905, and may include any effect operation using various effect devices. The image display may be an effect in which the display color of the decorative LED changes, as an example of the advance notice effect or the tilt effect different from the image display, or an effect in which sound that is a special effect sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R. May be In addition to or in place of part or all of such advance notice effects and tilt effects, lighting or blinking of the decorative LED, operation of the movable effect member 9060, display of effect images, display of sound effects It may be controlled to execute a preview effect or a tilt effect combining some or all of the outputs. Further, the variable display result is a "big hit" when including a period in which a preview effect combining a plurality of types of effect modes is executed rather than a case where the advance effect is executed using only one type of effect mode. The possibility of giving a predetermined gaming value such as the possibility may be increased.

  Furthermore, the movable effect member effect may be executed in response to a change in the display mode of the meter in the meter effect. In the movable effect member effect, part of the movable effect member 9060 once advances to the front of the display area of the image display device 905 by the movable effect member 9060 changing from the non-tilting state to the tilting state and then again to the untilting state It is an effect that As a result, the player is informed in a manner that the display mode of the meter changes in the meter effect.

  When the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is "big hit", a finalized decorative figure to be a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905. As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", it is identical to the predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is sufficient if the finalized decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived and displayed by arranging and stopping and displaying the decorative symbol.

  When the special drawing display result is "loss", the decorative display constituting the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without the variable display mode of the decorative design being the reach mode, and the non-specific display result The finalized decorative design that is In addition, when the special figure display result becomes “missing”, after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the decorative pattern which forms the predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed, thereby the non-specific display There is also a case in which the finalized decorative design is derived and displayed as a result.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described.
On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 at predetermined time intervals, and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be performed after the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop is performed.

  When the CPU 90103 which has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt disable state and executes predetermined game control timer interrupt processing. The game control timer interrupt process includes, for example, switch process, main side error process, information output process, random number update process for gaming, special symbol process process, normal symbol process process, command control process, etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901 A process for controlling the progress etc. is included.

  The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 via the switch circuit 90110. The main side error processing is processing that diagnoses an abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 901, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to a hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example. The game random number updating process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main substrate 9011 side by software.

  As an example, the random numbers for gaming used on the main substrate 9011 side include a random number value MR'1 for determining a special image display result, a random number value MR'2 for determining a big hit type, and a random number value for determining a variation pattern. It is sufficient if there is an MR'3 and a random number MR'4 for determining a common drawing display result. The random number value MR'1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as the "big hit". The random number value MR′2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number used to determine the jackpot type in the case where the variable display result is “big hit”, for example, any of a plurality of types such as “non-probability variation” or “probability variation” It is a numerical value. The random number value MR'3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Random number value MR'4 for common drawing display result determination is used to determine whether the variable display result in the common drawing game by normal symbol display 9020 is "per common drawing" or "general drawing loss", etc. Is a random value used for

  In the special symbol process process included in the timer control process for game control, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the RAM 90102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation of the second special symbol display device 904B, the opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, and the like according to a predetermined procedure. . The normal symbol process process is a process of controlling the display operation of the normal symbol display 9020 to enable variable display of the normal symbol, tilt operation setting of the movable wing in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, and the like.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 9011 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 9012 or the like. As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in I / O 90105, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in RAM 90102, to effect control board 9012 After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, the transmission of effect control commands based on the settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). In the start winning determination process, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 9022A and the second start port switch 9022B are on. At this time, if the first starting opening switch 9022A is on, based on the fact that the game ball has passed the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 906A, the special figure game using the first special figure A first start winning process for updating the first special map pending storage number, which is the pending storage number, is performed. On the other hand, if the second starting opening switch 9022B is on, based on the fact that the game ball has passed the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 906B, the special figure game using the second special figure A second start winning process is performed to update the second special map pending storage number, which is the pending storage number.

  As an example, in the first start winning process, it is determined whether or not the number of first special map reservations is equal to a predetermined upper limit. At this time, if the number of first to-be-saved storages has reached the upper limit value, the first start winning process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of first Tokushu storage memories is less than the upper limit value, the first hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the first hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of RAM 90102, is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is increased by one when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special view game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to Thereafter, a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning is extracted and stored as hold data in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  In the second start winning process, it is determined whether or not the number of second special view reservations has reached a predetermined upper limit value. At this time, if the number of second special-image storages has reached the upper limit value, the second start winning process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of second Tokushu storage memories is less than the upper limit value, the second hold storage count value, which is the storage value of the second hold storage count counter provided in the predetermined area of RAM 90102, is incremented by one. Thus, the second reserved memory number count value is increased by one when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special view game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to Thereafter, a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning is extracted and stored as hold data in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S90101 shown in FIG. 40, CPU 90103 selects one of the processes in steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the predetermined area of RAM 90102. Run.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S90110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display are displayed based on the presence / absence of holding data stored in the first special view holding storage unit and the second special view holding storage unit. A determination is made as to whether or not the special drawing game is to be started by the device 904B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" is variably displayed based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR'1 for determining the special image display result. Determine before the results are derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, the finalized special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B is set corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game Ru. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". The variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern as any one of a plurality of types based on the result of predetermination as to whether or not the variable display result is to be a "big hit". The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is preset corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the variable display time from when the variable display of the special symbol is started to when the determined special symbol to be the variable display result is derived is determined. In addition, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is to be "reach" when the variable display result is "loss". Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is to be "reach" by determining the change pattern when the change display result is "loss" in the change pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2."

  The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation processing, processing for setting for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the process from the start of the variation of the special symbol The process of measuring time is included. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of step S90113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the finalized special symbol as the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Contains the process of setting up the Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is on. When the jackpot flag is on, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state based on that the special drawing display result is "big hit" is set, and the value of the special drawing process flag is Update to 4 ”. When the big hit flag is off, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S90114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. In this big hit opening pre-processing, on the basis of the variable display result becoming “big hit” etc., the processing etc. which starts the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and sets the big winning opening to open state etc. It is included. In this process, for example, the upper opening round may be performed by setting the upper limit of the period during which the special winning opening is in the open state to "29 seconds". In addition, if a short hit opening round is performed by setting the upper limit of the period which makes a big winning opening open state to "0.1 second", when the "big hit" type is provided with "probable", Good. When the big hit opening pre-processing is executed, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of step S90115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 9023, etc. And the like are included to determine whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. When the special winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6".

  The jackpot post-processing in step S90116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “6”. In this big hit opening post process, processing to determine whether or not the number of times of execution of the round game with the big winning opening opened has reached a predetermined upper limit number, or the next round game when the upper limit number has not been reached Includes a process of waiting until the start of the event. Then, when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”, while when the number of round game executions reaches the upper limit number, the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Is updated to

  The big hit end processing of step S90117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “7”. In this big hit end processing, waiting corresponding to a period in which ending effect is executed as a rendering operation for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state by a rendering device such as the image display device 905, the speakers 908L, 908R, the game effect lamp 909, etc. It includes a process of waiting until time elapses, a process of performing various settings for controlling to a definite change state or a short time state according to success or failure of the definite change control condition, and the like. For example, depending on whether the jackpot type is “probable change” or “non-probable change”, a setting for controlling to a positive change state or a short time state is performed. Thereafter, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90110 of FIG. 40 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 41, CPU 90103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is "0" (step S231). The second special figure reservation storage count is the number of reserved storages of the special view game using the second special view by the second special symbol display device 904B. The CPU 90103 may read the second hold storage count value and determine whether the read value is “0”.

  When the number of second special figure holding storages is other than "0" at step S90231 (step S90231; NO), the holding data stored in a predetermined area of RAM 90102, for example, the leading area of the second special drawing holding storage Numerical data representing a predetermined random number is read out (step S90232). Thereby, the gaming random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning at the second start winning opening in the start winning determination process of step S90101 shown in FIG. 40 is read out. The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90232, for example, by updating the second reserved memory number count value by decrementing the second reserved memory number count value by one, updating is performed such that the second special image reserved memory number is decremented by 1 and The stored content in the unit is shifted (step S90233). For example, the pending data stored in the storage area lower than the pending number "1" in the second special view pending storage unit is shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S90233, the total pending storage number may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102, is updated to "2" (step S90234).

  If it is determined in step S90231 that the number of second special view reservations is "0" (step S90231; YES), it is determined whether the number of first special views pending storage is "0" (step S90235). The first special figure reservation storage count is the number of reserved storages of the special view game using the first special view by the first special symbol display device 904A. The CPU 90103 may read the first pending storage count value and determine whether the read value is “0”. As described above, the process of step S90235 is executed when it is determined in step S90231 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, and the number of first special views suspension storage is “0”. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special view game using the second special view starts being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view.

  In addition, the special drawing game using the second special drawing is not limited to one to be executed prior to the special drawing game using the first special drawing. That is, regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the special figure game may be executed in the order in which the gaming balls passed the starting winning opening. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening has passed is associated with the holding data or separately from the holding data, in association with the holding number. It may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90102 so that the order in which the start conditions are satisfied can be specified for the special drawing games corresponding to the respective pending data.

  If it is determined in step S90235 that the number of first special view reservations is other than "0" (step S90235; NO), the pending data stored in a predetermined area of RAM 90102, for example, the first area of the first special view pending storage Numerical data representing a predetermined random number is read out (step S90236). Thereby, the gaming random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning at the first start winning opening in the start winning determination process of step S90101 shown in FIG. 40 is read out. The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90236, the first TOC reserve memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting 1 from the 1st reserve memory number count value, etc. The stored content in the unit is shifted (step S90237). For example, the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” in the first special view hold storage unit is shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S90237, the total pending storage number may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special feature designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined as either "big hit" or "losing" (step S90239). As an example, in the process of step S90239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing beforehand in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 or the like is selected and set in the use table for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR′1 for special figure display result determination is allocated to the determination result of whether the special figure display result is “big hit” or “losing” It should be done. If CPU 90103 determines the special figure display result by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on the numerical data indicating the special figure display result determination random number value MR ′ 1 read from the random number buffer for variation. Good.

  FIG. 42A shows a determination example of the special view display result by the process of step S90239. In this manner, using the numerical data indicating the random number value MR'1 for determining the special figure display result or the special figure display result determination table, it is determined whether the special figure display result is "big hit" or "losing". It may be determined at a predetermined rate. In the determination example shown in FIG. 42 (A), the determination ratio as to whether or not the special view display result is to be “big hit” is made different depending on the presence or absence of the probability change control in the probability change state. The CPU 90103 may determine that the probability variation control is being performed when the probability variation flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is on.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (A), when the probability change control is performed in the probability change state, the special view display result is “at a higher rate than when the probability change control is not performed in the normal state or the short time state. It is determined to be a "big hit". Therefore, for example, the probability change control is performed based on the fact that the probability change flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is "probability" by the jackpot end processing of step S90117 shown in FIG. 40, for example When in the state, the special view display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than when the probability change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state, and is likely to be in the big hit gaming state.

  Also, regardless of whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 904B, The special figure display result is determined at a predetermined ratio according to the presence or absence of the probability change control. On the other hand, assignment of a decision value to a special drawing display result corresponding to each of the special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special drawing game by the second special symbol display device 904B. You may prepare a different decision table. In this case, if the assignment of the determination value to the predetermined special drawing display result is different between the special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the special drawing game by the second special symbol display device 904B. You may

  After that, the CPU 90103 determines whether the special map display result determined by the process of step S90239 is a "big hit" (step S90240). If the special view display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S90240; YES), the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102 is set to the on state (step S90241). Also, the jackpot type is determined to be any of a plurality of types (step S90242). As an example, in the process of step S90242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101 or the like is selected and set in the use table for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR′2 for jackpot type determination may be allocated to the determination result as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used. The CPU 90103 may determine the big hit type by referring to the big hit type determination table based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR′2 for determining the big hit type read from the random number buffer for variation.

  FIG. 42B shows a determination example of the jackpot type by the process of step S90242. In this determination example, the jackpot type is determined to be either “non-probability change” or “probability change” at a predetermined ratio regardless of whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Note that depending on whether the variation special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, the determinable jackpot type may be made different or the determination ratio of the jackpot type may be made different. As an example, when the variation special figure is the first special figure, the jackpot type can be determined to be "probable" at a predetermined rate, while when the variation special figure is the second special figure, the big hit type is "probable "" May not be determined.

  After the process of step S90242 is executed, the jackpot type is stored (step S90243). The CPU 90103 may store the big hit type by storing data indicating the determination result of the big hit type in the big hit type buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90102.

  If the special view display result is not a "big hit" in step S90240 (step S90240; NO) or after executing the process of step S90243, the finalized special symbol to be the variable display result of the special symbol in the special view game is determined. (Step S90244). As an example, when it is determined in step S90240 that the special figure display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol indicating a symbol of "-" previously determined as a lost symbol is determined as a confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90240 that the special view display result is "big hit", any of the special symbols predetermined as a plurality of big hit symbols according to the big hit type determination result in step S90242 If it is decided, it should be decided on the special symbol. More specifically, when the jackpot type is "non-deterministic", a special symbol indicating the number "3" may be determined as the determined special symbol. If the jackpot type is "certain", a special symbol indicating the number "7" may be determined as the determined special symbol.

  After executing the processing of step S90244, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "1" (step S90245), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. When the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "1" in the process of step S90245, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process of step S90111 shown in FIG. 40 is executed.

  If, in step S90235, the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is "0" (step S90235; YES), after performing the predetermined demonstration display setting (step S90246), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, whether or not an effect control command for specifying a demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image or the like on the image display device 905 has been transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 or not Determine At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo specification command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 43 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S90111 of FIG. 40 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 43A, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (step S90261). Then, if the big hit flag is on (step S90261; YES), the variation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special view display result is "big hit" is determined (step S90262). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is off (step S90261; NO), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lost time when the special view display result is "loss" is determined (step S90263).

  FIG. 43 (B) shows a fluctuation pattern. Among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to "non reach" not to be the reach mode and "reach" to be the reach mode, respectively. In addition, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "big hit" or the like.

  In the process of step S90262 shown in FIG. 43A, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined using the big hit fluctuation pattern determination table prepared by, for example, storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 90101. In the big hit variation pattern determination table, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probability variation” or “probability variation”, the numerical value to be compared with the random value MR′3 for variation pattern determination is the variation pattern determination result , As long as it is assigned. The CPU 90103 refers to the big hit variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR ′ 3 read from the variation random number buffer, and the variable display result is “big hit”. The corresponding variation pattern may be determined.

  In the processing of step S90263 shown in FIG. 43 (A), corresponding to the normal state where the gaming state is the normal state, and the case where the time saving control is performed in the gaming state being the definite change state or the time reduction state, The fluctuation pattern at the time of losing is determined using any of a plurality of lost fluctuation pattern determination tables prepared in advance. In a plurality of lost fluctuation pattern determination tables, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR'3 for fluctuation pattern determination is determined according to whether it is normal time or time-short and the total number of pending storage It only needs to be assigned to the result. The CPU 90103 refers to one of the loss variation pattern determination tables according to the normal time and the time-span on the basis of the numerical data indicating the random number value MR ′ 3 for variation pattern determination read out from the variation random number buffer. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" may be determined.

  In the lost variation pattern determination table, when the total number of pending storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined to be "non-reach" at a higher rate than when less than the predetermined number. It is sufficient if the decision value is assigned. As described above, when the number of special drawing reservations is equal to or more than the predetermined number, it may be set so that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is less likely to be determined as the reach mode than when it is less than the predetermined number. As a result, when the number of special view holding memories is relatively large, the average variable display time is shortened compared to the case where the number is relatively small, thereby suppressing the occurrence of invalid start winnings, or the game ball by the player. Can be reduced.

  FIG. 44 (A) shows an example of determination of a fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit. In this determination example, the change pattern determination ratio at which normal reach effect is executed, such as the change pattern PA'3-1, is performed at super reach reach effect such as the change pattern PA'3-2 and PA'3-3. It is set to be lower than the determined rate of variation pattern.

  FIG. 44B shows a determination example of the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing. In this determination example, the change pattern determination ratio at which normal reach effect is executed, such as the change pattern PA'2-1, is performed at super reach reach effect such as the change pattern PA'2-2 or PA'2-3. It is set to be higher than the determination rate of the variation pattern to be performed.

  Further, at the time of the big hit, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed is set to be higher than that at the time of losing. As a result, when the variable display result is derived after the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the possibility that the variable display result is a "big hit" is increased.

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 44 (A), the determination ratio of the change pattern in which the reach effect of Super B is executed, such as change pattern PA'3-3, is the reach effect of Super A, such as change pattern PA'3-2. Is set to be higher than the determination rate of the variation pattern to be executed. On the other hand, in the determination example shown in FIG. 44 (B), the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern for which the reach effect of the supermarket B is executed, such as the fluctuation pattern PA'2-3, is Super A's such as the fluctuation pattern PA'2-2. It is set to be lower than the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern for which the reach effect is performed. Further, at the time of the big hit, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the supermarket B is executed is set to be sufficiently higher than that at the time of losing. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the gaming state is the big hit gaming state, the variable display result is obtained after the reach effect of the super B is executed at a higher rate than the case where the big hit gaming state is not set. It is derived.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (B), the variation pattern PA'2-1 to PA'2-3 and the variation pattern PA'3-1 to PA'3-3 share the special pattern variation time and content. On the other hand, it is different whether the variable display result is "loss" or "big hit". With the setting of the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 44 (A) and (B), when the reach effect of the super reach is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the normal reach effect is executed. In addition, when the reach effect of the super B is executed, the big hit expectation degree is raised more than when the reach effect of the super A is executed.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S90262 and S90263, a special figure fluctuation time which is a variable display time of the special symbol is set (step S90264). The special figure fluctuation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol is the required time from when the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game is started until the finalized special symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 43 (B), the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 90103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special figure fluctuation time.

  Following the processing of step S90264, of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 904B, In order to start one of the special drawing games for which the start condition is satisfied, setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed (step S90265). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A is performed. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special special symbol display device 904B is performed.

  After the process of step S90265 is executed, transmission of a command at the start of variation of the special symbol is set (step S90266). For example, when the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 90103 sends a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, the first to the presentation control board 9012 from the main board 9011. In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is designated. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special drawing designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 90103 sends a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, the second to the production control board 9012 from the main board 9011 In order to sequentially transmit the pending storage number notification command, the storage address in the ROM 90101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated.

  The first change start command and the second change start command start the change in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 904A, or the second special figure in the second special special symbol display device 904B. It is an effect control command for designating the start of fluctuation in the special drawing game used. The fluctuation pattern designation command is variably displayed on the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is an effect control command for specifying a variation pattern such as a decorative pattern. The variable display result notification command is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol.

  After the process of step S90266 is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S90267), and the variation pattern setting process is ended. When the value of the special view process flag is updated to "2" in step S90267, when the next timer interrupt is generated, the special symbol variation process of step S90112 shown in FIG. 40 is executed.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described.
In the effect control board 9012, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute predetermined effect control main processing. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 90122, set various initial values, and set registers in the CTC mounted on the effect control board 9012. . Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on. The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 9011 occurs in addition to the timer interrupt generated each time the predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 9011 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but an interrupt occurs when using a CPU that does not automatically cause the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue prohibited orders. The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in I / O 90125, a control signal serving as an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from main substrate 9011 via relay substrate 9015. Capture The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 90122. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be in the off state, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main substrate 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process, various operations such as display operation of effect images in the display area of the image display device 905, sound output operation from the speakers 908L and 908R, lighting operation of the light emitting material such as the game effect lamp 909 and the decoration LED, etc. The control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the rendering control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 9011. Subsequent to the effect control process processing, effect random number updating processing is executed, and software is used to update numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 90122 as various random number values used for effect control.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 90120 selects one of the following steps S90170 to S90176 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122. Run.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S90170 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". In the variable display start waiting process, the variable display of the decorative design on the screen of the image display device 905 is performed based on whether or not the first change start command or the second change start command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 is received. It includes a process of determining whether to start or not. The first change start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 904A is started. The second change start command is an effect control command for notifying that a special drawing game using the second special drawing by the second special symbol display device 904B is started. When such a first change start command or a second change start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S 90171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. In order to perform the variable display of the decoration pattern on the top and other various effect operations, including the process of determining the finalized decoration pattern and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the kind of display result, etc. There is. When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of step S90172 is a process performed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, various control data are read out from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and various effects during the variable display of the decorative symbol It includes processing to control. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, in response to receiving the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 9011, etc., the finalized display of the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol as the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed completely Processing is included. In addition, in response to the end code being read out from the predetermined effect control pattern, the finalized display of the finalized decorative symbol may be displayed. In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command has elapsed, the effect control substrate 9012 side autonomously without the effect control command from the main substrate 9011 It is possible to derive and display the finalized decorative symbol on the final display and to fix the variable display result. After such effect control, etc., the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  The variable display stop process of step S90173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the variable display stop process, the big hit gaming state starts based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command, the determination result of whether or not the big hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 is received, etc. Includes the process of determining whether or not And, when the big hit game state is started corresponding to the variable display result “big hit”, while the value of the presentation process flag is updated to “4”, the special figure display result corresponds to “lost” When the big hit gaming state is not started, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0".

  The big hit display process of step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The big hit display process includes a process for executing a big hit notification effect for reporting the start of the big hit gaming state based on the reception of the big hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 or the like. Then, when the execution of the jackpot notification effect ends, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5".

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S 90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this big hit, during the effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the screen of the image display device 905. Or outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command to the voice control board 9013, turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED by outputting a command to the lamp control board 9014 And, various effects control in the big hit gaming state is executed. Further, in the big hit internal effect process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”, for example, in response to the reception of the big hit end designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 or the like.

  The jackpot end effect process of step S90176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern and the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the screen of the image display device 905. Or outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 908L and 908R by outputting a command to the voice control board 9013, turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 909 and the decorative LED by outputting a command to the lamp control board 9014 And various effect control at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0".

  FIG. 46 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S90171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 46A, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a result of the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol (step S90401). At this time, the effect control CPU 90120 is based on the determined content at the start of the change, such as the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 or the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. , Determine the final stop symbol. There are "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability change (big hit)", "probability change (big hit)", etc. as the start of the change at the start of the change according to the combination of the change pattern .

  FIG. 46 (B) shows a determination example of a decorative symbol to be the final stop symbol in the process of step S90401. In this example, when the change start time determination content is "non-reach (loss)", different decorative symbols are determined as the final stop symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L and 905R. The effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical value data indicating a left determined symbol determination random value updated by the effect random counter or the like provided in the random number circuit 90124 or the predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and is stored in the ROM 90121 in advance By referring to the prepared left fixed symbol determination table or the like, the left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 905L in the display area of the image display device 905 in the fixed decorative symbol is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the right determined symbol determination random number value updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and the right determined symbol determination table stored and prepared in the ROM 90121 is referred to. The finalized decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the "right" decorative symbol display area 905R in the display area of the image display device 905 in the finalized decorative symbol is decided by the decision decorative symbol or the like. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting or the like in the right determined symbol determination table. Subsequently, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining the middle fixed decoration symbol which is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the middle fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in the ROM 90121 is referred to Thus, the finalized decorative symbol to be displayed in the stop display on the "in" decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 among the finalized decorative symbols is determined.

  If the content determined at the start of fluctuation is "reach (loss)", the same decorative design is determined as the final stop design in the decorative design display areas 905L and 905R of "left" and "right". The effect control CPU 90120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the left and right fixed symbol determined and updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the random counter for effect, etc., and stores the left and right fixed symbol determination table stored and prepared in the ROM 90121 in advance. By referring to or the like, the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 905 in the display pattern of the "left" and "right" of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905R aligned and stop symbol display the same decorative symbol decide. Further, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 is referred to Thus, the finalized decorative symbol to be displayed stopped in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 905C in the display area of the image display device 905 in the finalized decorative symbol is determined. Here, for example, when the determined decoration pattern becomes a big hit combination, as in the case where the symbol number of the middle determined decoration symbol becomes the same as the symbol number of the left determined decoration symbol and the right determined decoration symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting to the symbol number of the inside fixed decoration pattern, the fixed decoration pattern may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the symbol number of the right fixed decoration pattern may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern may be set corresponding to the pattern difference.

  When the content at the start of the change is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the same applies to "left", "middle", "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R Decide on the final stop pattern of the decorative pattern of. The effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the jackpot determination symbol updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the big hit finalized symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121, the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L in the display area of the image display device 905, The 905C and 905R are all displayed on the same display number that is stopped and displayed. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probability" or "probability", whether or not the jackpot promotion promotion is performed, etc., either the normal symbol or the probability symbol is determined as the decorative symbol. It is good if it is decided. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "non-deterministic", one of a plurality of types of normal symbols is determined to be the finalized decorative symbol. In addition, when it is determined that the jackpot type is “probable change” and the jackpot promotion promotion is not performed, a determined decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of kinds of probability variation symbols. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot middle promotion effect is to be executed even if the jackpot type is “probable change”, the determined decoration symbol is determined from among a plurality of types of normal symbols. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by preventing the jackpot promotion effect from being executed even though the definite variation symbols are equally drawn out and displayed as the finalized decorative symbol.

  In the process of step S90401, if the content determined at the start of the change is "non-probability change (big hit)" or "probability change (big hit)", whether or not to execute a probability promotion effect such as re-lottery production or a big hit middle promotion effect It may be determined. In the re-lottery effect, it is temporarily recognized as difficult or unrecognizable that the control in the probability variation state is made by displaying the ornament pattern of the non-probability variation big hit combination consisting of the same regular symbols once during the variable display of the decoration symbols. It is possible to notify that the decoration pattern is controlled to be a probability change state by variably displaying the decoration pattern again and by stopping and displaying the decoration pattern of the probability variation big hit combination consisting of the same odd variation pattern. In addition, after the decoration pattern is re-varied in the re-lottery effect, the decoration pattern of the non-probability variation big hit combination is stopped and displayed, and it may not be notified that it is controlled in the probability variation state. In addition, it is sufficient if it can be informed that the jackpot is controlled to the certainty state by executing the jackpot promotion effect during the jackpot gaming state or at the end of the jackpot gaming state. If it is determined in the process of step S90401 that the re-lottery effect is to be performed, the combination of the decorative symbols to be temporarily stopped may be determined before the re-lottery effect is performed.

  Subsequent to the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in step S90401, the effect control CPU 90120 performs special aspect super reach effect determination processing (step S90402). In step S90402, as an example, CPU 90120 for production control extracts the numerical data which show the random number value for special mode super reach production decision which is renewed with random number circuit 90124 or the random counter and the like for production. Subsequently, the presence or absence of the execution of the special aspect super reach presentation is determined by referring to the special aspect super reach presentation determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like.

  FIG. 47 shows a configuration example of the special aspect super reach effect determination table. In the special aspect super reach effect determination table shown in FIG. 47, for example, a variation pattern PA'3-2 in which the reach effect of the super reach such as super A or super B is executed and the variable display result is “big hit”. Or PA'3-3, depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the variable display result is "loss", depending on whether it is the variation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'2-3, the special aspect A numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining super reach effect determination is assigned to any of the determination results of “with execution” for executing the special mode super reach effect or “without execution” for not performing the special mode super reach effect. Just do it. In FIG. 47, the determination ratio of each determination result is described instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result.

  In the special mode super reach effect determination table shown in FIG. 47, the change pattern is a change pattern PA′3-2 or PA′3-3 in which the reach effect of the super reach is performed and the variable display result is “big hit”. Regardless of whether it is the fluctuation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'2-3 in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the variable display result is "loss", it is "with" or "without". It is set to be determined. When the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA'3-2 or PA'3-3 in which the reach effect of super reach is executed and the variable display result is "big hit", the special mode super reach effect is always executed. It may be set as

  In the determination example shown in FIG. 47, if the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA′3-2 or PA′3-3 in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the variable display result is “big hit”, the special It is set so that the determination ratio of "execution in" in which aspect super reach production is performed is higher than the determination ratio of "no execution" in which the special aspect super reach presentation is not performed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'2-3 in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the variable display result is "loss", the special aspect super reach effect is executed. The determination ratio of "with execution" to be performed is set to be lower than the determination ratio of "without execution" in which the special aspect super reach effect is not performed. Further, when the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the variable display result is the "big hit", the special pattern super reach effect is executed when the variation pattern PA'3-2 or PA'3-3 is the "big hit". The determination ratio of “Yes” is set to be sufficiently higher than in the case of the variation pattern PA′2-2 or PA′2-3 in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the variable display result is “lost”. It is done. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the gaming state is the big hit gaming state, the variable display result is obtained after the special aspect super reach effect is executed at a higher rate than the case where the big hit gaming state is not set. It is derived.

  After executing the process of step S90402, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a meter effect determination process (step S90403). FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed in step S90403 of FIG. 46 (A) as the meter effect determination process. In the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 48, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not there is execution of a special aspect super reach effect (step S90501). In step S90501, as an example, when the effect control CPU 90120 determines “execution in progress” in step S90402, the effect control CPU 90120 may determine that there is execution of the special aspect super reach effect.

  If it is determined in step S90501 that there is execution of the special aspect super reach effect (step S90501; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the timing for changing the meter to MAX (step S90502). In step S90502, as one example, effect control CPU 90120 selects a MAX timing determination table prepared by storing in advance a predetermined area of ROM 90121 as a use table for determining the timing of changing the meter to MAX. Set. In the MAX timing determination table, for example, the variation pattern is the variation pattern PA'3-2 or PA'3-3 in which the reach effect of super reach such as super A or super B is executed and the variable display result is "big hit". Depending on whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the variable display result is "loss", it is compared with the random value for determining the MAX timing depending on whether it is the fluctuation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'2-3. Are assigned to the decision result of either "high speed fluctuation" which changes the meter to MAX during high speed fluctuation, or "super reach" which changes the meter to MAX during super reach reach production. Just do it. Here, during high-speed fluctuation is when the decorative symbol is rapidly changing at a constant speed in all of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R. The effect control CPU 90120 refers to the MAX timing determination table based on, for example, numerical value data indicating a random number value for determining MAX timing extracted from the random counter for effect provided in the random number circuit 90124 or the predetermined area of the RAM 90122. The timing to change the meter to MAX may be determined by

  FIG. 49 shows a configuration example of the MAX timing determination table. In this MAX timing determination table, the variation patterns are variation patterns PA'3-2 and PA'3-3 in which the reach effect of super reach such as super A or super B is executed and the variable display result is "big hit". In the case, it is set to be able to be determined "in high speed fluctuation". On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'2-3 in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed and the variable display result is "lost", it is not determined to "during high speed fluctuation" Is set as. Therefore, when the meter changes to MAX during high-speed fluctuation, reach effect of the super reach is executed, and it is definitely notified that the variable display result will be "big hit".

  After executing the processing of step S90502, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not “in super reach” is determined in step S90502 (step S90503). When it is determined in step S90503 that "super reach" is determined (step S90503; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines to what level the meter should be changed during high-speed fluctuation (step S90504). In step S90504, as one example, the CPU for effect control 90120 extracts numerical value data indicating a random value for determining the high-speed fluctuation middle arrival level, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the random counter for effect. Subsequently, by referring to the high-speed variation middle arrival level determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like, it is determined which of the level 0 to the level 2 is used as the high-speed middle arrival level.

  FIG. 50 shows an example of the configuration of the high-speed variation middle arrival level determination table used in step S90504. In the high-speed variation arrival level determination table shown in FIG. 50, the numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the high-speed variation arrival level may be allocated to any of the determination results of level 0 to level 3. In FIG. 50, the determination ratio of each determination result is described instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result. As an example, the determination ratio of level 0 to level 3 is set regardless of the special map fluctuation time. However, the determination ratio may be set to be different according to the special figure fluctuation time. For example, it is a change pattern according to whether it is a change pattern in which reach effect of super A is executed or which change pattern in which reach effect of super B is executed. You may decide by. Further, which of the level 0 to the level 3 is to be selected may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "loss".

  After executing the processing of step S90504 or when it is determined that "during super reach" is not determined in step S90503 (step S90503; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the meter effect determination processing.

  If it is determined in step S90501 that there is no execution of the special aspect super reach effect (step S90501; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the presence or absence of the execution of the meter effect that causes the change of the meter to MAX. (Step S90505). In step S90505, as one example, the CPU for effect control 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for meter effect determination, which is a gusset updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the random counter for effect. Subsequently, by referring to a meter effect determination table which is a cassette which is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121, the presence or absence of execution of the meter effect which is a cassette is determined.

  FIG. 51 shows an example of the configuration of a meter effect determination table which is a gusset. In the meter effect determination table serving as a squeeze shown in FIG. 51, “execution performed” is performed to execute a meter effect having a squeezing numerical value compared with a random value for determining a meter effect representing a gassing Not be assigned to any "no execution" decision result. In FIG. 51, the determination ratio of each determination result is described instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result.

  As an example, in the meter effect determination table, which is a gusset shown in FIG. 51, the ratio determined as "not executed" is set to be higher than "with execution". On the other hand, when the special aspect super reach effect is executed, the meter effect is always executed, and as described above, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the gaming state is the big hit gaming state, the big hit The special aspect super reach effect is set to be executed at a higher rate than when it does not enter the gaming state. Such setting can give the player a sense of expectation when the meter effect is executed.

  After executing the processing of step S90505, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not there is an execution of a meter effect that becomes a gusset (step S90506). If it is determined in step S90506 that there is an execution of a meter effect that becomes a gusset (step S90506; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 finally determines to what level the meter should be changed (step S90507).

  In step S90507, as an example, when determining the final arrival level of the meter, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for final arrival level determination updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter Do. Subsequently, by referring to a final arrival level determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121, it is determined which of Level 1 to Level 3 is to be used as the final arrival level.

  FIG. 52 shows a configuration example of the final arrival level determination table used in step S90507. In the final arrival level determination table shown in FIG. 52, the numerical value to be compared with the random value for final arrival level determination may be assigned to any of the determination results of level 1 to level 3. In FIG. 52, the determination ratio of each determination result is described instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result. As an example, the rate determined as the final arrival level increases is set to be lower. Note that, for example, which of the level 1 to the level 3 is to be selected may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “loss”.

  After executing the process of step S90507, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to which level the meter which is not changed up to MAX is changed during the high speed fluctuation (step S90508). For example, when the final arrival level is determined to be level 1 in step S90507, in step S90508, the effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the level 0 and the level 1 the high-speed change middle arrival level is to be. When the final arrival level is determined to be level 2 in step S90507, in step S90508, the effect control CPU 90120 determines which of the level 0 to level 2 the high-speed variation middle arrival level is to be. Further, when the final arrival level is determined to be level 3 in step S90507, in step S90508, the effect control CPU 90120 determines which one of level 0 to level 3 the high-speed variation middle arrival level is to be. In step S90508, as an example, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical value data indicating a random value for determining the high-speed fluctuation middle arrival level, which is updated by the random number circuit 90124 or the effect random counter or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the high-speed variation middle arrival level determination table stored in advance in the ROM 90121 or the like, it is determined which of the level 0 to level 3 to be used as the high-speed middle arrival level.

  If it is determined in the process of step S90508 that the level is a high-speed variation middle arrival level lower than the final arrival level determined in step S90507, the meter effect is executed again during super reach, and the meter reaches the final arrival. You can change it to the level. On the other hand, if the final arrival level determined in step S90507 is determined as the high-speed variation middle arrival level in the process of step S90508, does the meter not change even if the meter effect is executed during super reach? , You do not have to perform the meter effect during the super reach.

  FIG. 53 shows an example of the configuration of the high-speed variation middle arrival level determination table used in step S90508. In the high-speed variation middle arrival level determination table shown in FIG. 53, for example, the high-speed change depending on whether the final arrival level of the meter in the meter effect that is set is level 1, 2 or 3 A numerical value to be compared with the random value for determining the variation reaching level may be assigned to any of the determination results of level 0 to level 3. In FIG. 53, the determination ratio of each determination result is described instead of the determination value assigned to each determination result. As an example, the determination ratio of level 0 to level 3 is set regardless of the special map fluctuation time. However, the determination ratio may be set to be different according to the special figure fluctuation time. For example, it is a change pattern according to whether it is a change pattern in which reach effect of super A is executed or which change pattern in which reach effect of super B is executed. You may decide by. Further, which of the level 0 to the level 3 is to be selected may be determined at a different ratio depending on whether the variable display result is "big hit" or "loss".

  In addition, when an illusionary meter effect is executed, as an example, the ratio determined in high-speed fluctuation middle arrival level is set to be higher. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50, when the meter effect for changing the meter to MAX is executed, the ratio determined in high speed variation middle reach level is set to be lower. Then, when the meter changes to MAX, the special aspect super reach effect is always executed, and as described above, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the gaming state is the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state The special aspect super reach effect is set to be executed at a higher rate than when it does not occur. These settings increase the jackpot expectation when the meter does not change during high-speed fluctuations, or when the level of the meter that changes during high-speed fluctuations is small, than when the level of meters changed during high-speed fluctuation is high .

  After execution of the processing of step S90508 or when it is determined that the execution of the meter effect which is a garbled is not performed in step S90506 (step S90506; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the meter effect determination process.

  After executing the process of step S90403, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the preliminary effect determining process (step S90404). FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed in step S90404 of FIG. In the advance notice effect determination processing shown in FIG. 54, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice effect (step S90521). In step S 905 21, as an example, CPU for effect control 90120 selects a notice effect determination table prepared by storing it in a predetermined area of ROM 90121 in advance as a use table for determining the presence or absence of notice effect execution. set. In the preliminary announcement effect determination table, for example, whether the variable display result specified by the variable display result notification command or the like transmitted from the main substrate 9011 is “big hit” or “losing”, or meter effect during super reach effect In accordance with the amount of change in the meter, the numerical value to be compared with the random number value for determining the advance announcement effect is assigned to any of the decision results of “with execution” for executing the advance announcement effect and “without execution” for not executing the advance announcement effect. It should be done. The effect control CPU 90120 refers to the advance effect determination table, for example, based on numerical value data indicating a random value for determining advance effect, extracted from the random counter for effect provided in the random number circuit 90124 or the predetermined area of the RAM 90122. The presence or absence of the execution of the advance notice effect may be determined by

  FIG. 55 (A) shows a configuration example of a notice effect determination table selected as a use table when the meter effect during the super reach effect is not executed. In this preliminary presentation effect determination table, when the variable display result is "big hit", the ratio determined as "executed" is set to be higher than the ratio determined as "execution not performed". Further, when the variable display result is "loss", the ratio determined to be "performed" is set to be lower than the ratio determined to be "not executed". By the setting of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 55 (A), when the advance notice effect is executed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the advance notice effect is not executed. The amount of meter to be changed by the meter effect executed during the super reach may be calculated, for example, by subtracting the level of the meter to be changed during fluctuation from the level of the meter to be finally changed.

  FIG. 55 (B) shows a configuration example of a notice effect determination table selected as the use table when the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed. In this preliminary presentation effect determination table, when the amount of change of the meter in the meter effect during the super reach production is 1 level or 2 levels, it is set so as to be always determined as "no execution". In addition, when the amount of change of the meter in the meter effect during super reach production is 3 levels or 4 levels, the ratio determined to be “performed” is higher than the ratio determined to be “not performed” It is set to. Further, as described above, in the variable display in which the meter effect is performed, the advance effect in the meter change notification mode is performed. Therefore, when the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed by the setting of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 55 (B), during the super reach effect than when the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is not performed. The amount of change of the meter in the meter production of is large.

  After executing the processing of step S90521, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not there is execution of the advance effect (step S90522). If it is determined in step S90522 that there is execution of the advance notice effect (step S90522; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not there is execution of the meter effect during the super reach effect (step S90523). In the process of step S90523, for example, when it is determined to change the meter to MAX during super reach effect in the process of step S90502 in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. When the final reach level is not determined as the level, it may be determined that there is execution of the meter effect during the super reach effect.

  If it is determined in step S90523 that the meter effect is being executed during the super reach effect (step S90523; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode of the advance effect to be the meter change notification mode (step S90524). ).

  After executing the processing of step S90524, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the execution period of the advance effect in the meter change notification mode (step S90525). In step S90525, as one example, the effect control CPU 90120 calculates the amount of meter to be changed in the meter effect executed during the super reach. Subsequently, by referring to the notice effect execution period determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 90121, the execution period of the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is 4 seconds, 6 seconds, 8 seconds, 10 seconds. Decide which one to use. The amount of meter to be changed by the meter effect executed during the super reach may be calculated, for example, by subtracting the level of the meter to be changed during fluctuation from the level of the meter to be finally changed.

  FIG. 56 shows a configuration example of the preliminary announcement execution period determination table used in step S90525. In the notice effect execution period determination table shown in FIG. 56, any decision result of 4 seconds, 6 seconds, 8 seconds, or 10 seconds corresponding to the amount of meter to be changed by the meter effect executed during the super reach. It should be assigned to As one example, the execution period of the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is set to be longer as the amount of meters to be changed in the meter effect executed during the super reach increases. According to the setting shown in FIG. 56, when the execution period of the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is long, the player can change the meter to MAX more than when the execution period of the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is short. Can give a sense of expectation.

  If it is determined in step S90523 that there is no execution of the meter effect (step S90523; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the effect mode of the advance effect is an effect mode other than the meter change notification mode (step S9052) S90526). In step S90526, the meter change notification mode may be determined at a predetermined determination rate. If it is determined in step S90526 that the meter change notification mode is selected, even though the meter effect is not executed, the notice effect of the meter change notification mode is executed. As described above, even though the meter effect is not executed, the advance effect of the meter change notification mode which is a gap may be executed.

  After executing the processing of step S90525 or after executing the processing of step S90526, when it is determined that the execution of the advance notice effect is not performed at step S90522 (step S90522; NO), the CPU 90120 for effect control determination End the process.

  After executing the process of step S90404, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the upset effect determination process (step S90405). In step S90405, as an example, CPU for producing control CPU 90120 selects and sets a baiting effect determination table prepared by storing in advance a predetermined area of ROM 90121 as a use table for determining the execution of baiting effect. . In the arrear effect determination table, for example, a numerical value to be compared with a random number value for determining a stair effect is executed according to whether or not the advance effect in the meter change notification mode is executed, “execution is performed” Or, it may be assigned to any of the determination results of “no execution” that does not execute the tilting presentation. The effect control CPU 90120 refers to the flash effect determination table on the basis of, for example, numerical data indicating random value for flash effect determination extracted from the random counter for effect provided in the random number circuit 90124 or the predetermined area of the RAM 90122. Thus, the presence or absence of the execution of the tilt effect may be determined.

  FIG. 57 shows an example of the configuration of the tilt effect determination table. When the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed, the tilt effect determination table is set such that the ratio determined as "executed" is higher than the ratio determined as "execution not performed". ing. In addition, when the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is not executed, the ratio determined to be "execution on" is set to be lower than the ratio determined to be "execution not performed". With the setting of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 57, the degree of anticipation in which the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed is enhanced when the tilt effect is executed, than when the tilt effect is not executed.

  In addition, when the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed, the ratio determined to be "executed" is set to be lower than the ratio determined to "no execution", and the meter change notification mode The ratio determined to be "executed" may be set to be higher than the ratio determined to be "not executed" when the preview effect at is not executed, or in the meter change notification mode The ratio determined to be "executed" may be set to be the same as the ratio determined to be "not executed" regardless of whether or not the preview effect of is performed.

  After executing the processing of step S90405, the effect control CPU 90120 determines that the effect control pattern is any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S90406). For example, the CPU 90120 for effect control has any of a plurality of prepared special pattern fluctuation control patterns prepared corresponding to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command and the various effects determined in the processing of steps S90402 to S90405. Select and set as the usage pattern.

  After the process of step S90406 is executed, an initial value of a presentation control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 is set, for example, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command (step S90407). Then, the setting for starting the change of the decorative symbol etc. in the image display device 905 is performed (step S90408). At this time, for example, the display control instruction specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S90406 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 90123 or the like, and the like. It is only necessary to start the variation of the decorative symbol in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R provided on the display screen of.

  Following the processing of step S90408, in response to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, a setting for updating the pending storage display in the start winning storage display area 905H is performed (step S90409). For example, the display region corresponding to the holding number “1” may be erased in the start winning storage display area 905H, and the entire display region may be moved leftward one by one. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S90410), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S90172 of FIG. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 58, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines, for example, based on the effect control process timer value, whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed (step S 90451 ). As an example, in the process of step S90451, the effect control process timer value is updated, and when the end code is read from the predetermined effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value after the update, etc., the variable display time It may be determined that has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S90451 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S90451; NO), the CPU for effect control 90120 determines whether or not it is an upset effect execution period (step S90452). For example, in the effect control pattern determined to be the use pattern according to the setting in step S90405, the tilt effect execution period may be determined in advance. If it is determined in step S90452 that the swing production execution period is in progress (step S90452; YES), the CPU 90120 for production control executes a tilt production operation control process for executing the swing production (step S90453).

  After executing the process of step S90453 or when it is determined in step S90452 that it is not in the depression effect execution period (step S90452; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the advance effect execution period ( Step S90454). The preview rendering execution period may be determined in advance, for example, in the rendering control pattern determined as the usage pattern according to the setting in step S90404. If it is determined in step S90454 that the preview rendering execution period is in progress (step S90454; YES), the CPU 90120 for rendering control executes a preview rendering operation control process for executing the preview rendering (step S90455). In step S90455, when the meter change notification mode is determined in step S90524, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the advance notification effect in the meter change notification mode.

  After executing the process of step S90455 or when it is determined in step S90454 that it is not the advance notice effect execution period (step S90454; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it is the meter effect execution period (step S90454; Step S90456). The meter effect execution period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern according to the setting in step S90403. If it is determined in step S90456 that the meter effect execution period is in progress (step S90456; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a meter effect operation control process for executing a meter effect (step S90457).

  After executing the process of step S90457 or when it is determined in step S90456 that it is not a meter effect execution period (step S90456; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 is a reach effect execution period for executing reach effect It is determined whether or not it is (step S90458). The reach effect execution period may be determined in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern according to the change pattern or the setting in step S90402. If it is determined in step S90458 that the reach effect execution period is in progress (step S90458; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 performs effect operation control for executing reach effect (step S90459). For example, in the process of step S90459, various commands are created to execute the reach effect in a predetermined effect mode according to the effect control execution data read from the effect control pattern etc., and the display control unit 90123 or the voice control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014, the motor drive circuit 9016 and the like may be transmitted. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905, a predetermined effect sound is output from the speakers 908L and 908R, and the game effect lamp 909 and the decoration LED are blinked or lit, It is sufficient that the reach effect can be performed by a predetermined effect device by operating the movable effect member 9060 or combining some or all of them.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the reach effect operation control process executed in step S90459 of FIG. In the reach effect operation control process shown in FIG. 59, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether it is a super reach effect execution period (step S90601). If it is determined in step S90601 that it is not in the super reach effect execution period (step S90601; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 executes normal reach effect operation control processing for executing normal reach effect (normal reach effect) ( Step S90602).

  If it is determined in step S90601 that it is a super reach effect execution period (step S90601; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether it is a special aspect super reach effect execution period (step S90603). When it is determined in step S90603 that the special mode super reach effect execution period is not determined (step S90603; NO), the CPU for effect control 90120 executes the normal mode super reach effect operation control process for executing the normal mode super reach effect. (Step S90604).

  When it is determined in step S90603 that the special mode super reach effect execution period is determined (step S90603; YES), the CPU 90120 for effect control controls the special mode super reach effect operation control process for executing the special mode super reach effect. The process is executed (step S90605).

  After executing the process of step S90602 or after executing the process of step S90604 or after executing the process of step S90605, the effect control CPU 90120 ends the reach effect operation control process.

  If it is determined in step S90458 that the reach effect execution period is not determined (step S90458; NO) or after the process of step S90459 is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 selects, for example, the effect control pattern selected corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. After performing the rendering operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern based on the setting etc. in (step S90460), the variable display in-progress rendering process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S 90451 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S 90451; YES), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 has been received (step S 90461). At this time, if the symbol determination command is not received (step S 90461; NO), the variable display effect processing is ended and the process waits. In addition, after the variable display time elapses, when the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol determination command, a predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to receive the symbol determination command normally. You may

  When the symbol determination command is received in step S 90461 (step S 90461; YES), for example, in the variable display of the decorative symbol such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to VDP of display control unit 90123 or the like. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol as the display result (step S 90462). Further, a predetermined time which is predetermined as the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set (step S90463). Then, after the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the variable display stop process (step S90464), the variable display effect process is ended.

Next, the execution timing of the meter effect and the like will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 60 (A) is a special symbol based on the variation pattern PA'2-2, PA'2-3, PA'3-2 or PA'3-3 in which super reach effect such as super A or super B is executed. An example of the execution timing of reach production, tilt production, advance notice production in a meter change notification mode, meter production, special mode super reach production in variable display will be shown. The special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'3-2 is set to 65 seconds. Further, the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PA'2-3 or PA'3-3 is set to 78 seconds.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60A, after the variable display of the special symbol is started at the timing T0 (0 seconds), the meter effect during the high speed fluctuation is started at the timing T1 (for example, 4 seconds after the timing T0). In this example, when the meter effect during high speed fluctuation is started, the display mode of the meter displayed on the image display device 905 changes to the level 1 at a predetermined timing. Then, at time T2 (for example, 8 seconds after timing T0), the meter effect during high speed fluctuation is ended. Then, after the normal reach effect is started at timing T3 (for example, 12 seconds after timing T0), the normal aspect super reach effect is started at timing T4 (for example, 20 seconds after timing T0). Then, at time T5 (for example, 28 seconds after time T0), the effect is started. Then, at time T6 (for example, 32 seconds after time T0), the effect is ended and the advance effect in the meter change notification mode is started. Then, at timing T7 (for example, 36 seconds after timing T0 (4 seconds after timing T6)), the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is ended, and the meter effect during super reach is started. In this example, when the meter effect during super reach is started, the display mode of the meter displayed on the image display device 905 changes by 3 levels from the display mode of level 1 to the display mode of MAX of level 4 at a predetermined timing. I will. Then, the meter effect is ended at timing T8 (for example, after 44 seconds from the timing T0), and the super reach effect shifts from the normal mode super reach effect to the special mode super reach effect. Then, at timing T9 (for example, after 52 seconds from timing T0), the super reach effect shifts from the special aspect super reach effect to the normal aspect super reach effect. And in the variable display of the special symbol based on timing T10 (for example, fluctuation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'3-2, after 65 seconds from timing T0, it is based on fluctuation pattern PA'2-3 or PA'3-3 In the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol ends at 78 seconds after the timing T0.

  FIG. 60 (B) is a special symbol based on the variation pattern PA'2-2, PA'2-3, PA'3-2 or PA'3-3 in which super reach effect such as super A or super B is executed. The example of the execution timing of reach production and meter production in variable display is shown. The special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'3-2 is set to 65 seconds. Further, the special pattern fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern PA'2-3 or PA'3-3 is set to 78 seconds.

  In the example shown in FIG. 60A, after the variable display of the special symbol is started at the timing T0 (0 seconds), the meter effect during the high speed fluctuation is started at the timing T1 (for example, 4 seconds after the timing T0). In this example, when the meter effect during high speed fluctuation is started, the display mode of the meter displayed on the image display device 905 changes to the level 1 at a predetermined timing. Then, at time T2 (for example, 8 seconds after timing T0), the meter effect during high speed fluctuation is ended. Then, after the normal reach effect is started at timing T3 (for example, 12 seconds after timing T0), the normal aspect super reach effect is started at timing T4 (for example, 20 seconds after timing T0). Then, at timing T7 (for example, 36 seconds after timing T0), the meter effect during super reach is started. In this example, when the meter effect during super reach is started, the display mode of the meter displayed on the image display device 905 changes by two levels from the display mode of level 1 to the display mode of level 3 at a predetermined timing. Go. Then, the meter effect is finished at timing T8 (for example, after 44 seconds from timing T0). Then, the normal mode super reach effect is executed also in a period from timing T8 to timing T9 (for example, after 52 seconds from timing T0) corresponding to a period in which the special aspect super reach effect can be executed. And in the variable display of the special symbol based on timing T10 (for example, fluctuation pattern PA'2-2 or PA'3-2, after 65 seconds from timing T0, it is based on fluctuation pattern PA'2-3 or PA'3-3 In the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the special symbol ends at 78 seconds after the timing T0.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (A) and 60 (B), the rendering time from timing T8 to timing T9 is made to be the same regardless of whether or not the special aspect super reach rendering is executed. . As described above, regardless of whether the change pattern is a change pattern in which the super reach effect of the super A is performed or a change pattern in which the super reach effect of the super B is performed, the super reach effect is performed. In the case of the fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 secures the effect time of the special mode super reach effect and makes it possible to execute. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare different variation patterns depending on whether or not to execute the special aspect super reach effect in the ROM 90101 of the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and the capacity for storing the variation patterns is suppressed. be able to.

  Next, the main effect screen when the meter effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 61 is a variable display in which a super reach effect is executed, and an effect screen in the case where a meter effect is executed after an advance effect and an advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode are executed, and An effect screen when the meter effect is executed without the advance effect in the meter change mode being executed, and an effect when the meter effect is executed without executing both the tilt effect and the advance effect in the meter change mode Show the screen.

  FIG. 61A shows an effect screen when super reach effect is started. As shown in FIG. 61A, the meter MT is always displayed as a predetermined display regardless of whether the meter effect is being performed. As described above, although the meter effect can be executed even during high speed fluctuation, in FIG. 61A, the display mode of the meter MT is changed due to the meter effect during high speed fluctuation. It shows a state in which the display mode is level 1. In addition, changing the display mode of the meter MT to a high-level display mode, in other words, storing the "level" of the meter MT is compared to storing the "virtue" that protects the gods and Buddha etc. . Then, according to how much "devil" is finally accumulated, that is, according to the final reaching level of the meter MT, the action of the character CG in various effects performed during the super reach effect or the super reach effect is performed. It is different. For example, if an instruction is performed such that the character CG takes an active action to accumulate the "virtue", the fact that a lot of "virtue" is eventually accumulated, that is, the final reaching level of the meter MT is high It is possible to give a player a sense of expectation about becoming a level.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (B1) at a predetermined timing during the super reach effect, when it is determined to execute the upset effect in the process of step S90405 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 46 (A). And, a direction is performed. As the tilt effect, a character CG is displayed and, for example, a message SG1 such as "Speak to save the virtues" is displayed. In addition, as a notice effect in the meter change notification mode, an effect of an aspect in which the character CG tries to go to the shrine and accumulate “Toku” is executed. Therefore, by displaying the character CG as the tilt effect and displaying, for example, the message SG1 such as "Speak and save the virtues", it is possible to execute the preview effect in the meter change notification mode as a game. Can give a sense of expectation to

  When it is determined in the process of step S90404 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 46 (A) that the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is determined to be performed, at a predetermined timing after the blink effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 61 (C1), the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed. As the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode, the character CG is displayed, and a message CG2 such as "Retain the virtue" is displayed. In addition, if the display mode of the meter MT changes to MAX, that is, if "Toku" accumulates to MAX, the special mode super reach effect is always executed. Then, when the special aspect super reach effect is executed, the possibility that the variable display result is a “big hit” is higher than when the special aspect super reach effect is not executed. Therefore, as the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode, the character CG is displayed and, for example, the message CG2 such as "Retain the virtues" is displayed, so that "worthiness" is accumulated up to MAX, that is, in the meter MT. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the display mode changes up to MAX.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S90405 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 46 (A), it is determined not to execute the upset effect, and in the process of step S90404 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. If it is decided not to execute the notice effect in the meter change notification mode, as shown in FIG. 61 (B2) and (C2), the advance effect in the tilt effect and the meter change notification mode is not executed. , Normal mode super reach production is performed. As the normal mode super reach effect, a character CG is displayed, and a message CG3 such as "not good" is displayed, for example. Here, the message CG3 displayed in the normal mode super reach effect is an expression which excessively exacerbates the player's expectation for the accumulation of the "virtue", that is, the change in the display mode of the meter MT. If it does not exist, for example, it may be a message having a degree of expression such as "How do I happen to do something good?" Or "Want to do something good?"

  Further, in the processing of step S90405 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 46A, it is decided to execute the upset effect, and in the process of step S90404 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. If it is determined not to execute the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode, as shown in FIG. 61 (B1), the upset effect is executed at a predetermined timing during the super reach effect, but thereafter As shown in FIG. 61 (C2), the normal mode super reach effect is performed without the advance effect in the meter change notification mode being performed. In this way, there is also a case where a staggering effect is performed.

  As shown in the notice effect execution determination table of FIG. 55, when the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed, if the amount of change of the meter in the meter effect during the super reach effect is 3 levels or 4 levels, The advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode may be always performed. Therefore, when the notice effect in the meter change notification mode as shown in FIG. 61 (C1) is executed and the meter effect during the super reach effect is performed, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is performed. At a predetermined timing after that, as shown in FIG. 61 (D1), the meter effect of the aspect in which the amount of change of the meter is large is executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in the notice effect execution determination table of FIG. 55, when the meter effect during super reach effect is executed, the amount of change of the meter in the meter effect during super reach effect is 1 level or 2 levels For example, the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is not performed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 61 (D2) at a predetermined timing during the super reach effect, when the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed without executing the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode. The meter effect of the aspect in which the amount of change of the meter is small is performed.

  Further, as described above, the movable effect member effect may be executed in response to the change in the display mode of the meter in the meter effect. When the movable effect member effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 61 (D1) or (D2), the movable effect member 9060 changes from the non-tilting state to the tilting state, and then again to the non-tilting state, An effect is performed in which a part of the effect member 9060 is temporarily advanced to the front of the display area of the image display device 905. When the movable effect member effect is executed, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 in accordance with the operation of the movable effect member 9060. The movable effect member 9060, which imitates "a house break" appearing in a fairy tale, etc., becomes a tilted state from a non-tilted state, and then becomes a non-tilted state again, as if "a haunt at a house" An effect as if it were done is executed. Then, for example, in accordance with the timing at which the movable effect member 9060 imitating the "outdoor breakup" is in a tilting state, "outside breakout" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 905 as a predetermined effect. The effect image is displayed in such a manner that an oval appears from the movable effect member 9060 that imitates "." At that time, as shown in FIG. 61 (D1), when the meter effect of an aspect in which the amount of change of the meter is large is executed, an effect image of an aspect in which a large amount of ovals appear is displayed. As shown in (D2), when the meter effect of the aspect in which the change amount of the meter is small is executed, the effect image of the aspect in which only a small amount of small size comes out is displayed. As described above, not only the amount of change of the meter but also the effect mode are differentiated between when the advance effect in the meter change notification mode is executed and when the advance effect in the meter change notification mode is not executed. Thus, it is possible to further improve the interest of the meter effect.

  FIG. 62 shows an effect screen when the meter effect is performed after the advance effect in the meter change notification mode is performed in the variable display in which the super reach effect is performed.

  When it is determined in the processing of step S90525 in the advance notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 54 that the execution period of the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is 8 seconds, the predetermined timing after the upset effect is performed As shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B, the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is performed for eight seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution period of the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is 4 seconds, as shown in FIG. 62A, the meter change is performed at a predetermined timing after the tilt effect is performed. The notice effect in the notification mode is performed for four seconds.

  Then, when the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed for 8 seconds, the meter MT increases by four levels in the meter effect during the super reach effect performed thereafter. In addition, since the level 4 is set to MAX as the level of the meter MT, the meter MT before the super-rake effect is executed when the advance effect in the meter change notification mode is executed for 8 seconds. Regardless of the level, the meter effect during the super reach effect is executed, whereby the meter MT always becomes MAX as shown in FIG. 62 (C1).

  On the other hand, when the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is performed only for 4 seconds, the meter MT increases only three levels in the meter effect during the super reach effect performed thereafter. Therefore, as shown to FIG. 62 (A), when the level of meter MT before the meter production in super reach production is performed is level 0, it is assumed that the notice production in a meter change alerting mode is performed. Also, if the rendering time is 4 seconds, as shown in FIG. 62 (C2), the display mode of the meter MT does not become MAX.

  FIG. 63 shows the effect screen when the display mode of the meter MT changes to MAX in the meter effect during super reach effect and the special mode super reach effect is executed, and the meter MT in the meter effect during super reach effect The production | presentation screen in case a normal aspect super reach production is performed is shown, without a special aspect super reach production being performed, without the display aspect of changing to MAX.

  FIG. 63 (A1) shows an effect screen when the display mode of the meter MT has changed to MAX in the meter effect during super reach effect. Thus, when the display mode of the meter MT changes to MAX, as shown in FIG. 63 (B1), the special mode super reach effect is executed at a predetermined timing thereafter. As a special mode super reach effect, a character CG is displayed, and a message SG4 of a special mode such as "May you benefit," or a mini character MG that is a symbol of an auspicious thing such as a wolf or a beck or a cat is displayed. In addition, when a variable display result is "big hit", an effect that is likely to be profitable is executed as an effect of notifying an effect result of super reach effect. Therefore, by displaying the character CG as a special mode super reach effect, for example, by displaying a message SG4 of a special mode such as "May you benefit," or a mini character MG that is a symbol of a lucky thing such as a wolf or a beckoning cat, It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the variable display result is a "big hit".

  FIG. 63 (A2) shows an effect screen when the display mode of the meter MT has not changed to MAX in the meter effect during the super reach effect. As described above, when the display mode of the meter MT does not change to MAX, the special mode super reach effect is not executed even when the predetermined timing thereafter comes, as shown in FIG. 63 (B2), A normal aspect super reach production is performed. While the character CG is displayed as a normal mode super reach effect to be executed corresponding to a period in which the special mode super reach effect can be executed, a message SG5 of a normal mode such as "May it happen that is good" is displayed A mini character MG that is a symbol of a fortune such as a wolf or a beckoning cat is not displayed. The message SG5 displayed in the normal mode super reach effect executed corresponding to the period in which the special mode super reach effect can be executed has excessive expectation of the player that the variable display result is "big hit" It may be a message of an expression such as "Can chance" or "May this change occur?"

  Then, when the period in which the special aspect super reach effect can be executed ends, the normal aspect super reach effect is executed regardless of which of the special aspect super reach effect and the normal aspect super reach effect is executed, and the super reach The effect of the aspect which alert | reports the presentation result of a presentation is performed. When the variable display result is "big hit", for example, a character KG imitating a god appears on a treasure ship FG as shown in FIG. 63 (C1) as an effect of notifying an effect result of the super reach effect. The effect that is likely to be profitable is executed. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "losing", as an effect of notifying an effect result of the super reach effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (C2), for example, a character imitating a god is not riding either. A production that is likely to be profitable, such as the appearance of only the ship BG, is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (D1), when the effect likely to benefit as shown in FIG. 63 (C1) is executed as the effect of notifying the super reach effect of the effect result. The same decorative design is displayed on the predetermined effective line in the decorative design display areas 905L, 905C, 905R of "left", "middle", "right", and the fixed decorative design which becomes a big hit combination by being stopped and displayed Derivation is displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 63 (D2), when a rendering likely to be profitable as shown in FIG. 63 (C2) is executed as the effect of notifying the super reach effect of the effect result. With the stop display of the decoration design which constitutes the predetermined reach combination on the predetermined effective line in the decoration design display areas 905L, 905C and 905R of "left", "middle" and "right" The finalized decorative design is derived and displayed.

  Next, in such a pachinko gaming machine 901, an example in the case where the volume as a rendering effect is adjusted by the adjustment operation of the player will be described.

  Also, during the game or during the waiting for customer demonstration display, the volume of the game effect can be adjusted by the adjustment operation of the player. Further, when the volume is adjusted, the effect control CPU 90120 displays an adjustment result image indicating the adjustment result of the volume in a mode in which the adjustment result image and the demonstration image are superimposed on a predetermined area of the image display device 905. The adjustment result image is displayed, for example, in the form of bar graph display that increases and decreases in the left and right direction. The mode of the adjustment result image is arbitrary as long as the player or the like can recognize the current volume, and may be a mode of displaying numerical values or characters corresponding to the volume, a circle graph mode, or the like. In the menu mode, it is possible to adjust the volume only when the item "volume adjustment" is selected from the menu screen and the volume adjustment mode is selected. In addition, in response to the reception of the predetermined operation during display of the customer waiting demo, transition from the display of the customer waiting demo to the menu mode is made.

  FIG. 64 (A) is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the game. During the game, the adjustment result image R is displayed on the lower right end of the image display device 905. Then, the display area of the adjustment result image R overlaps a part of the display area Ar of the decorative pattern, as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 64 (B) is a display example of the adjustment result image R during the demonstration display. During demonstration display, as shown in the figure, for example, when an image indicating that a customer demonstration such as "during demonstration display" is being performed is displayed on the image display device 905, and an adjustment operation is performed. The adjustment result image R is superimposed on the demonstration display image.

  FIG. 64 (C1) is a display example of the menu screen in the menu mode. In the menu mode, there is a volume adjustment mode selection operation by the player, and the volume adjustment can be performed only when the screen is switched to the volume adjustment mode selection screen shown in the display example of FIG. 64 (C2). Selection of items in the menu mode can be made by, for example, tilting operation of the stick controller, and pushing and pulling the trigger button of the stick controller or pressing the push button while selecting the item of "volume adjustment" By switching the screen, the screen changes to a screen in which the volume adjustment mode is selected as shown in FIG. 64 (C2). The operation means for item selection is not limited to the stick controller, but may be a cross key or the like.

  FIGS. 64 (D1) and (D2) show examples of error images that can be displayed in the error notification processing, and the error image is not erased even during the derivation display of the variable display result, and is displayed prior to the adjustment result image R. Be done.

  Here, a main example in the case where the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2 of the variable display result will be described with reference to timing charts of FIGS. 65 (A) and (B). As shown in FIGS. 65 (A) and 65 (B), although the predetermined period T1 becomes the display period of the adjustment result image R from the time when the latest adjustment operation is performed, at least a part of the predetermined period T1 and the derivation display period T2 The adjustment result image R is erased when the The example shown in FIG. 65 (A) is a case where the derived display period T2 overlaps the rear end of the predetermined period T1, and in this case, the adjustment result image R is not displayed until the next adjustment operation is performed. On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 65 (B) is the case where the derivation display period T2 is within the predetermined period T1, and in this case, when the derivation display period T2 ends, the adjustment result image R is displayed again, and the predetermined period The display is continued until T1 elapses. Although not illustrated, when the derived display period T1 overlaps with the front end of the predetermined period T1, the adjustment result image R is displayed after the end of the derived display period T2. As described above, since the adjustment result image R is erased in the derived display period T2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the derived variable display result.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an example in which the adjustment result image R is displayed during a predetermined effect will be described. When the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed and the variable display of the decorative symbol is in the reach state as shown in FIG. 66 (A), a predetermined reach effect in the normal reach is executed, and then, as shown in FIG. 66 (B) By displaying a special development notification image on the image display device 905, the notification of development to super reach is performed. During the fluctuation, when the adjustment operation by the player is performed, the adjustment result image R is displayed on the lower right end of the image display device 905 as shown in FIG. 66 (B).

  Subsequent to such a development notification, an operation promotion image P is displayed during execution of reach production in super reach as shown in FIG. 66 (C). Then, when the operation by the push button is performed, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), a predetermined cut-in effect is performed. When the operation by the push button is not performed during the display period of the operation promotion image P, the cut-in effect is not performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 66E, for example, the final stop symbol of the big hit combination is derived and displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 66B to 66D, the adjustment result image R remains displayed on the image display device 905 until the predetermined time T1 elapses after the adjustment operation is performed. In this case, the adjustment result image R is displayed at a position not overlapping with the development notification image or the operation promotion image P. However, in the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result, the adjustment result image R is erased as shown in FIG. 66 (E) even if the predetermined period T1 has not elapsed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the visibility of the variable display result derived and displayed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute advance notice effects in the meter change notification mode. Further, the effect control CPU 90120 can execute a meter effect that can change the display mode of the meter MT to MAX. Then, the CPU 90120 for effect control controls the meter during the super reach effect in the case where the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed and not performed before the meter effect in the super reach effect is executed. Since the amount of change of the meter when changing the display mode of the meter MT and the amount of oval displayed as a predetermined effect are made different in the effect, the interest of the meter effect of changing the display mode of the meter MT can be improved it can.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, when the preview effect in the meter change notification mode is executed before the effect control CPU 90120 executes the meter effect in the super reach effect, the super reach effect During the super reach production, if the advance notice production in the meter change notification mode is not executed before changing the meter by 3 levels or 4 levels in the middle meter production and executing the meter production during the super reach production Since only one level or two levels of the meter are changed in the meter effect of, it is possible to improve the expectation for the preview effect in the meter change notification mode to be performed.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, the effect control CPU 90120, as the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode, is 8 seconds if the meter change amount in the meter effect during the super reach effect is 4 levels The preview production is performed, and when the amount of change in the meter during the super reach production is 3 levels, the preview production for 4 seconds is performed, so the interest of the preview production in the meter change notification mode is improved Can.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, since the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the scrawling effect whether the advance effect in the meter change notification mode is executed, the notice in the meter change notification mode It is possible to raise the player's expectation for the presentation to be executed.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, since the effect control CPU 90120 can execute the special mode super reach effect in response to the change of the display mode of the meter MT to MAX, the display mode of the meter MT is It is possible to improve the player's expectation for changing up to MAX.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 901, for example, when the volume is adjusted, the effect control CPU 90120 superimposes the adjustment result image indicating the adjustment result of the volume on the effect image or the demo image in the predetermined area of the image display device 905 It displays in the form which Then, since the effect control CPU 90120 erases the adjustment result image R during the derived display period T2 of the variable display result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the variable display result.

[Example of effect of re-displaying the meter once after special effect]
Next, when a special effect such as super reach effect is performed, the display of the meter MT is once erased, and then the meter MT is redisplayed according to the operation of the movable effect member 9060. An example of the effect of performing “ The “meter once reappeared after redisplaying effect” described below can be performed in addition to or in addition to the various effects described above.

  The display of the meter MT, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, is a suggestion that indicates an expectation that would be advantageous to the player by changing the display mode in multiple stages, and is executed at least during the variable display. It is possible. As a change effect which can change the display mode of such a suggestion display, as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, etc., the effect of changing the display mode of the meter MT according to the operation of the movable effect member 9060, etc. An effect is feasible.

  The meter MT is an image that is basically always displayed on the image display device 905, and the level of the display mode can give the player an expectation for an advantageous state (a state advantageous to the player) such as a big hit. It is a suggestion display to make a stage. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, various other special effects are provided as effects that can give the player a sense of expectation for an advantageous state such as a big hit in the image display device 905. For this reason, the player may sometimes pay attention to the special effect rather than the meter MT when the special effect is executed. In such a case, when the meter MT is continuously displayed, the display of the meter MT is a special effect. It may get in the way. Therefore, when executing a predetermined special effect, in order to prevent interference with the special effect, it is possible to execute "Redisplay effect after temporarily erasing the meter" to execute an effect of temporarily erasing the display of the meter MT etc. It is.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an effect screen of a redisplay effect after the meter is once erased. 67 (A) to (D1) and (D2) show an example of the image displayed when the redisplay effect is performed after the meter is once erased by the image display device 905 according to the passage of time. . Once the meter has been erased, the redisplay effect indicates, for example, whether or not the normal reach effect is to be developed (transferred) to the super reach effect when the variable display as the variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the image display device 905 It is possible to carry out according to the reach development availability effect being performed.

  As shown in FIG. 67A, in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R described above, variable display (variable display) of decorative symbols 9051, 9052 and 9053 of "left", "middle" and "right" starts. After being done, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), when the decorative symbols 9051 and 9053 of "left" and "right" stop at the same symbol and become the reach display mode, the normal reach effect is executed. In the image display device 905, the meter MT is displayed before such a variable display is started, and the meter MT is displayed even after the start of the variable display.

  When a specific reach change pattern (including a specific normal reach change pattern and a specific super reach change pattern) is executed, the reach display mode is first reached as shown in FIG. 67 (B). Execution of is started. When the first time (a few seconds) elapses from the start of the normal reach effect, the reach development availability effect is executed as shown in FIG. 67 (C). Note that the reach development possibility presentation may be performed immediately after the start of the normal reach presentation.

  As shown in FIG. 67C, the reach development possibility effect causes the shutter image 9054 imitating the shutter to appear in the direction indicated by the broken line arrow in the drawing, and the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, 9053 which have been displayed so far. And, by displaying the shutter in a display mode that can shield the image of the meter MT or the like, it is an effect that indicates whether or not the variable display is developed (transferred) to the super reach effect. By performing such shutter display, the images of the decorative designs 9051, 9052, 9053 and the meter MT are temporarily erased in the effect mode shielded by the shutter image 9054.

  In the reach development possibility effect, as shown in FIG. 67C, the character “CANCEL” which can notify that the player is in the state of chance is shown on the image display device 905 on which the shutter image 9054 is displayed. The chance character image 9055 is displayed in a display area at least a part of which overlaps with the display area in which the meter MT was previously displayed. In the reach development possibility presentation, it is necessary to once erase the meter MT, because the chance character image 9055 is displayed in the display area overlapping the meter MT as described above.

  The chance character image 9055 may be displayed whenever the reach development availability effect is executed, and is randomly selected and determined whether or not to display when the reach development availability effect is executed. It may be In the case of selecting whether or not to display the chance character image 9055 by lottery, for example, when the variable display result is a big hit display result, the selection displayed rather than when the variable display result is an off display result The selection ratio displayed may be different depending on whether or not it is advantageous for the player, such as increasing the ratio.

  Then, when the second time (longer than the first time) has elapsed from the start of normal reach effect, the shutter image 9054 and the chance character image 9055 are erased by displaying such that the shutter of the shutter image 9054 is opened. The shutter display is finished, and as shown in FIG. 67 (D1) or (D2), the images of the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, 9053 and the meter MT once erased are re-displayed. As a result, the decorative patterns 9051, 9052, 9053 and the meter MT shielded by the shutter image 9054 are re-displayed in the effect mode in which the meter MT appears again.

  When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of a specific normal reach, as shown in FIG. 67 (D1), after reaching the end of the shutter display in the reach development possibility effect, the images of the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, 9053 and the meter MT are in the normal reach effect mode. It is redisplayed, and normal reach production before start of reach development availability production is continued. On the other hand, when the variation pattern is the variation pattern of a specific super reach, as shown in FIG. 67 (D2), after reaching the end of the shutter display in the reach development possibility effect, the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, 9053 and The image of the meter MT is redisplayed, and the normal reach production before the start of the reach development availability development is developed (changed) to a super reach performance, and the super reach production is started.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (D1), when the normal reach effect is continued, the movable effect member 9060 is not operated, and the level of the meter MT does not increase. Then, in the same display mode as before the start of the reach development possibility effect, the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, 9053 and the meter MT are displayed, and the normal reach effect is continued.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (D2), when the super reach effect developed from the normal reach effect is started, the same effect as the movable effect member effect shown in FIG. 61 is executed. For example, in a display mode in which the decorative symbols 9051, 9052, 9053 are reduced, the display is moved to the upper left corner of the screen (above the meter MT) in the image display device 905 and displayed. Furthermore, the following meter effects are performed. The movable effect member 9060 is operated to be in a non-tilting state after being changed to a tilting state, and a predetermined effect image in which an oval appears on the screen of the image display device 905 is displayed according to the operation timing. Further, in response to the operation of the movable effect member 9060, an effect of increasing the level of the meter MT is executed, and a super reach effect is developed.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (D2), when a super reach effect is developed, for example, a super reach effect as shown in FIGS. 61 to 63 is executed, or another predetermined super reach effect is executed. Be done.

  As shown in FIG. 67, after the meter MT being executed during the variable display is once erased upon the start of the execution of the reach development possibility effect which is a special effect, the execution of the movable effect member effect is carried out By performing the display control redisplayed according to, it is possible to suppress that the meter MT interferes with the reach development availability effect. Specifically, for example, when the reach development availability effect is executed without erasing the meter MT once, the entire display area of the image display device 905 can not be concealed, and at least a part of the display area partially overlaps with the chance character image 9055. Therefore, the meter MT interferes with the reach development availability. However, once the meter reappears after the erase operation as shown in FIG. 67 is performed, it is suppressed that the meter MT disturbs the reach development availability effect.

  In addition, the meter MT being executed during the variable display is once erased upon the start of the execution of the reach development possibility effect which is a special effect, and then redisplayed according to the execution of the movable effect member effect. By performing display control, when the meter is not accumulated, by continuing the display of the meter MT in such a state, it is also possible to obtain an effect capable of preventing giving the player a feeling of discomfort. .

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 67 (B) and 67 (C), during execution of the reach development availability effect, the display of the chance character image 9055 is executed in the display area at least a part of which overlaps the display area where the meter MT is displayed. Therefore, the meter MT and the chance character image 9055 overlap each other during execution of the reach development possibility presentation by the fact that the meter MT is once erased when the execution of the reach development feasibility presentation is started, and the visibility is thus improved. Can be suppressed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 67 (D2), redisplay of the meter MT etc. once erased is performed when the meter effect including the operation effect of the movable effect member 9060 is executed during the execution of the reach development availability effect. Thus, control related to the meter MT can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of redisplaying effect timing after erasing meter once]
Next, the execution timing of the meter effect etc. when the re-display effect after the meter is once erased as shown in FIG. 67 will be described. FIG. 68 is an explanatory view (timing chart) showing an example of execution timing of meter effect etc. when re-display effect is executed after the meter is once erased. In FIG. 68, a timing example of reach production, tilt production, notice production in a meter change notification mode, meter production, reach development availability production, and display presence or absence of a meter MT is shown.

  FIG. 68 shows a presentation example in which the meter MT reaches the LV 1 at the time of super reach development, and during the super reach, the meter MT becomes MAX to execute the special aspect super reach presentation. In FIG. 68, since the effect after the development to the super reach effect is shown as an example in which the same effect as the effect of FIG. 60 (A) is executed is shown as an example, after the effect to the super reach effect is I will omit the explanation of the effects.

  Referring to FIG. 68, in the case where the meter is once erased and redisplayed effect is executed, when reach state is reached, first, reach effect by normal reach effect is executed. In reach production, when the first time elapses from the start of normal reach production, execution of reach development availability production (shutter display) is started, and display of meter MT etc. (including decoration pattern) which has been displayed until then is once It is erased. Thereby, during execution of the normal reach effect, as shown in FIG. 67C, the shutter image 9054 and the chance character image 9055 are displayed, and the reach development availability effect in which the display of the meter MT etc. is once erased is started.

  Next, in the reach production, when the second time elapses from the start time of the normal reach production, the execution of the reach development possibility production (shutter display) is ended. At that time, the meter MT or the like (including the decorative pattern) which has been erased once is displayed again. As a result, at the end of the normal reach effect, the meter MT and the like (including the decorative pattern) which have been once erased are re-displayed as shown in FIG. 67 (D2). In the case of developing into super reach production after reach development propriety production, as shown in FIG. 67 (D2), the movable presentation member production in which the movable presentation member 9060 operates is executed, and the meter according to the movable production member production A meter effect that raises the level of MT is executed.

[Example of redisplay effect processing example after the meter is once erased]
Next, the meter-after-display redisplay effect processing executed by the effect control CPU 90120 for effecting re-display after the meter is once described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68 will be described.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the meter re-appearing effect processing after being erased once. The meter once-erased redisplay effect process of FIG. 69 is a process included in the above-described effect control process process, and in step S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 601 in the reach effect operation control process shown in FIG. It is executed as an alternative process of S90602 and S90603. The meter once-erased redisplay effect process of FIG. 69 may be provided as a process that constitutes a part of the reach effect operation control process of FIG. 59, and separately from the reach effect operation control process of FIG. As a dedicated process in the case of performing the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern for performing the post-redisplay effect, the process may be provided as a process executed only during the period until the start of the execution of the normal mode super reach effect.

  In the re-display effect processing after the meter is once erased, first, it is determined whether or not the current display of variation of the specific fluctuation pattern in which the re-display effect is to be performed after the erase is currently being displayed (S90701). In S90701, it is determined whether or not the variation display of the specific variation pattern is in progress based on confirmation of the type of the command specifying the variation pattern received at the start of the variation display.

  If the variation display of the specific variation pattern is not in progress in S90701, the process ends. On the other hand, when the variation display of the specific variation pattern is in progress in S90701, it is determined whether or not the normal reach effect is currently being executed (S90702). In S90702, based on confirming the time schedule of effect progression predetermined in the specific fluctuation pattern under execution of fluctuation display and the count value of the fluctuation display timer that counts the time from the start of fluctuation display. Then, it is determined whether or not the present is in the execution period of normal reach production in the specific variation pattern. Such determination is possible because for each fluctuation pattern, the time schedule of the timing of effect progression is determined in advance, and effect control for advancing the effect is executed based on the timing value of the fluctuation display timer. It is.

  If it is determined in S90702 that the normal reach effect is not being executed, it is determined whether or not the aforementioned first time has elapsed since the start of the normal reach effect (S90703). If it is determined in S90703 that the first time has not elapsed, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S90703 that the first time has elapsed, execution of reach development availability rendering to perform shutter display as shown in FIG. 67C is started, and display is performed by the meter MT or the like. The image which has been deleted is deleted (S90704), and the process is ended.

  When it is determined that the normal reach effect is being executed in the above-described S90702, after the start of the normal reach effect, based on confirming the time schedule of the effect progression in the specific change pattern and the time value of the change display timer. It is determined whether the above-mentioned second time has elapsed (S90705). If it is determined in S90705 that the second time has not elapsed, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S90705 that the second time has elapsed, it is checked whether the currently-running fluctuation pattern is to develop into a super reach effect (S90706). In S90706, it is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern that develops into super reach based on confirmation of the type of command specifying the variation pattern received at the start of the variation display.

  If it is determined in S90706 that the variable display pattern is to develop into super reach effect, execution of effect for operating the movable effect member 9060 is started as shown in FIG. 67 (D2) (S90707). Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (D2), in response to the operation of the movable effect member 9060, the shutter display is ended and the execution of the reach development availability effect is ended, and the image of the meter MT etc. The meter effect is redisplayed in the effect mode of the reach effect, the meter effect of increasing the level of the meter MT is executed (S90708), and the process is ended. Thereby, the effect of the variable display is developed from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect. After that, the super reach effect is executed by the effect processing provided separately from the meter once redisplayed effect processing after erasure.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S90706 that the variable display pattern does not develop to the super reach effect, the movable effect member 9060 is not operated as shown in FIG. 67 (D1) and the shutter display is ended to achieve reach development availability effect At the same time, the image of the meter MT or the like, which has been once deleted, is redisplayed in the effect mode of normal reach effect, an effect of not increasing the level of the meter MT is executed (S90709), and the process is ended. Thereby, the effect of the variable display is continued in the normal reach effect. After that, the normal reach effect is continued by the effect processing provided separately from the meter once redisplayed effect processing after erasure.

[First modification of effect redisplayed after the meter has been erased]
Next, a first modified example of the effect of re-displaying after the meter is once erased will be described. The effect control CPU 90120 may be configured to be able to continue to erase (do not redisplay) the display of the meter MT or the like once erased as a redisplayed effect after the meter is once erased. For example, a plurality of types of specific fluctuation patterns for performing reach development availability effects are provided, and among them, the first specific fluctuation pattern is displayed at the time of super reach development, such as the meter MT etc. As for the second specific fluctuation pattern, the display of the meter MT etc. that has been erased once is not displayed again at the time of super reach development in the reach development availability direction, and during the subsequent reach production (developed to super reach production In the case of the reach effect in the case, and in the case of the reach effect when not developed into the super reach effect (including both) during the direct effect may continue to be erased as it is, and may be redisplayed after the end of the variable display.

  In addition, even if it is a case where control such as redisplaying the meter MT etc. once erased is not redisplayed at the time of super reach development in the reach development availability effect, the operation of the movable effect member 9060 etc. during the subsequent super reach effect When the meter effect accompanied by is executed, re-display of the meter MT etc. which has been once erased may be executed.

  In addition, after erasing the display such as the meter MT in the reach development availability effect, at least one of the reach effect when developing into the super reach effect and at least one of the reach effect when not developing the super reach effect The display of the meter MT or the like may always be erased continuously.

  According to such a first modification, since the display control to continue the erased state of the display of the meter MT etc. which has been erased once can be executed when the execution of the reach development availability effect is started, it is possible to execute the meter MT Control of the game can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[A second modification of the effect of redisplaying after the meter has been erased]
Next, a second modified example of the effect of redisplaying after the meter is once erased will be described. The effect control CPU 90120 once erases the meter MT again as an effect when the display value of the meter MT is less than a predetermined value, the meter MT is once erased, and when the display value of the meter MT is a predetermined value or more, the meter MT is temporarily suspended. You may make it perform the production | presentation which does not erase | eliminate. For example, when the display value of the meter MT is less than the maximum value, the meter MT is once erased, and when the display value of the meter MT is the maximum value, the effect that the meter MT is not once erased is executed.

  When the display value of the meter MT is equal to or more than the predetermined value, it is considered that the player has a sense of superiority to others, an expectation of a state advantageous to the player, and the like by accumulation of the meter. When the display value of the meter MT is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the effect according to the player's mental state can be performed by executing the effect of not deleting the meter MT once. On the other hand, when the display value of the meter MT is less than the predetermined value, it is considered that the player is not interested in the meter MT because the meter is not accumulated, so when the display value of the meter MT is less than the predetermined value In order to execute the other effects with priority, the effects corresponding to the player's mental state can be performed by executing the effects of erasing the meter MT once.

  When the effect of not erasing the meter MT once is executed when the display value of the meter MT is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the chance character shown in FIG. The following effect control may be performed on the display position (display area) of the image 9055. The display position of the chance character image 9055 may be changed to a position not overlapping the display position (display area) of the meter MT. The effect may be restricted (for example, prohibited) so as not to execute the effect by the display of the chance character image 9055. In the case of executing such effect control, for example, the degree of expectation for a big hit when the chance character image 9055 is displayed (for example, when the chance character image 9055 is displayed by lottery, it becomes a big hit Is set so that the degree of expectation to the jackpot when the display value of the meter MT is greater than or equal to the predetermined value is higher than when the percentage displayed by lottery is higher than when the Since it is easy for the player's attention to be gathered toward the display value of the meter MT, changing the display control of the chance character image 9055 prevents the player from having a sense of dissatisfaction.

  According to such a second modification, control is performed according to the display mode of the display mode such as the meter MT when the execution of the reach development availability effect is started for the erasure of the meter MT etc. The control relating to the meter MT can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Main effect obtained by re-display effect after the meter is once erased]
(1) As shown in FIG. 67, after the meter MT being executed during the variable display is once erased upon the start of the execution of the reach development possibility effect which is a special effect, the movable effect member By performing display control redisplayed according to the execution of the effect, it is possible to suppress that the meter MT interferes with the reach development availability effect.

  (2) As shown in FIGS. 67 (B) and 67 (C), the display of the chance character image 9055 is performed in the display area at least a part of which overlaps with the display area where the meter MT is displayed. As it is executed, the meter MT is temporarily erased when the execution of the reach development availability production is started, so that the meter MT and the chance character image 9055 overlap and are viewed during the execution of the reach development availability production. It is possible to suppress the decrease in sex.

  (3) As shown in FIG. 67 (D2), when the meter display including the operation display of the movable effect member 9060 is executed while the reappearance of the meter MT etc. which has been erased once is being executed. As it is executed, control concerning the meter MT can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (4) As shown in the first modification, since display control can be executed to continue the erased state of the display of the meter MT or the like that has been erased once upon execution of the reach development availability effect being started. It is possible to diversify the control relating to MT and to improve the interest of the game.

  (5) As shown in the second modification, with regard to erasing of the meter MT etc. once, control according to the display mode of the display mode of the meter MT etc. when execution of the reach development availability effect is started is executed Thus, control related to the meter MT can be diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  (6) As shown in FIG. 61, the super reach effect is being performed when the advance effect in the meter change notification mode is performed and not performed before the meter effect during the super reach effect is performed. By changing the amount of change of the meter when changing the display mode of the meter MT in the meter effect, and the amount of oval displayed as a predetermined effect, the notice effect is performed before the meter effect is performed. By changing the mode of changing the display mode of the meter MT in the meter effect between the case and the case where it is not executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the meter effect that can change the display mode of the meter MT.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, by eliminating the adjustment result image R in the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the recognizability of the derivation result displayed.

[Other configuration example of redisplay effect after the meter is once erased]
(1) With regard to "redisplay after reappearance after erasing the meter once", normal reach rendition and presentation of reach development possibility are shown as an example as "special rendition" which is a condition for erasing the meter MT once. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as “special production”, normal reach production alone (normal reach production without reach development availability production), super reach production, notice (big hit notice, reach notice, etc.) production, pseudo-series production, and , Other effects such as sliding effects may be used. In addition, as the “special effect”, an effect using a movable body may be included. It is desirable that the presentation used as the “special presentation” use a presentation that is high in value for the player, such as the degree of expectation to be a big hit.

  (2) As for the “display once reappeared after the meter is erased,” a meter effect is shown as an example as a change effect that can change the meter MT. The meter effect is the effect operation of the movable effect member 9060, the effect that displays an effect image such as an oval, the effect that changes the display mode of the meter MT toward the upper limit value of the meter (level 4 (MAX)), the display of the meter It is a change effect including an effect of changing the aspect toward the lower limit value of the meter. As the change effects, effects such as changing the type or number of items, effects of changing the character (size, color, number, etc.), and other effects such as effects of increasing or decreasing the number It may be executed. Moreover, as a change effect that can change the meter MT, an effect that only the effect operation of the movable effect member 9060 is performed in addition to the meter MT, an effect that only the effect image is displayed in addition to the meter MT, and Other effects such as effects for displaying a specific character image acting on the meter MT may be used.

  (3) As for “Redisplay effect after erasing once,” an example in which the meter MT is temporarily deleted at the same timing as the timing when the execution of the special effect such as reach development availability effect starts is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the meter MT is temporarily erased when the execution of the special effect is started, for example, the execution of the special effect may be performed. The meter MT may be erased once when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start.

  (4) As for “Redisplay effect after erasing once,” an example is shown in which the meter MT is redisplayed at the same timing as the timing at which the execution of the special effect such as reach development availability effect ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this, “meter reappearance after erasing once” the meter MT at the timing (for example, timing immediately before the end of the fluctuation display, timing after the fluctuation display end, etc.) after the execution of the special effect is finished. It may be displayed again.

  (5) With regard to the shutter image 9054 displayed in the reach development possibility effect as a special effect, the image color may be selected and displayed from a plurality of colors so that the image color is different depending on the degree of expectation to be a big hit display result The image color may be selected from a plurality of colors and displayed so that the image color is different depending on the degree of expectation of developing into super reach.

  (6) In the "redisplay after reappearance after the meter is erased", the meter MT is once erased when a special effect such as reach development availability effect is executed, but in the pachinko gaming machine 901, the image display device 905 is selected. In the configuration in which another image display device is additionally provided, the meter MT once erased is displayed on the other image display device in a rendering mode such that the meter MT is moved to the other image display device and displayed. You may continue. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, when another image display device is provided in addition to the image display device 905, redisplay of the meter MT once erased may be performed on the other image display device. Good.

  (7) The shutter image 9054 (which may include the chance character image 9055) used in the reach development availability effect as a special effect may be executed as an effect dedicated to the reach development availability effect, and the change of the background image of the decorative symbol The scene change such as, and other effects such as a change of the effect mode may be displayed in common. As described above, when an image commonly displayed in a plurality of types of effects is used for special effects, in an image display device that displays images for effects in a plurality of layers, a plurality of types of images can be used as special effects. The effects may be displayed in the same layer or in different layers. When displaying an image used for a special effect in the same layer in a plurality of types of effects, setting the layer of the image to be displayed in a layer on the front side of the layer displaying the image of the meter MT In such a manner that the image of the meter MT is easily erased in such a manner that the image of the meter MT is concealed by the image used for the special rendering of the front layer without erasing the image of the meter MT it can.

  (8) As shown in FIG. 67 (D1), “Redisplay effect after erasing once” shows an example in which the effect of not changing the level of the meter MT is performed when the normal reach effect is continued. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the normal reach effect is continued, the effect of the movable effect member 9060 and the display of effects may be included to change the level of the meter MT. In that case, the reach effect may be performed in the effect mode of the normal reach effect as shown in FIG. 67 (D1). That is, the same meter effect may be performed when developing into a super reach effect and when continuing a normal reach effect. The meter effect is executed when developing into the super reach effect and when continuing the normal reach effect, but the level change amount of the meter MT is different (for example, the direction of developing the super reach effect continues the normal reach effect The amount of level change may be larger than that of the other.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the said form, A various deformation | transformation and application are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 901 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described form, and has some of the configurations described in the above-described form so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be

[Other configuration example]
(1) In order to achieve the purpose of improving the interest of the change effect of changing the display mode of the predetermined display such as the meter effect, the above-described gaming machine has the following configuration. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 901 etc.) for playing a game, and specific effect execution means (for example, CPU 90120 for effect control etc. capable of executing advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode) And a change effect execution means capable of changing a change effect capable of changing the display mode of the predetermined display to a specific stage (for example, change the display mode of the meter MT toward the upper limit value of the meter (level 4 (MAX)) Effects that change the display mode of the meter toward the lower limit (level 0) of the meter, effects that change the type or number of items, effects that change the size or color of the character, the number of people, etc. And a change effect execution unit that is capable of performing effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing effects such as numbers increasing or decreasing. Different modes are used to change the display mode of the predetermined display in the change effect depending on whether the specific effect is performed or not performed before the output is performed (for example, during super reach effect) The case where the display mode of the meter MT is changed in the meter effect during the super reach effect, in the case where the advance effect in the meter change notification mode is performed and the case in which the advance effect is not performed before the meter effect of It is characterized in that the amount of change of the meter, and the amount of oblong displayed as a predetermined effect are made different). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the change effect of changing the display mode of the predetermined display.

  (2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), the change presentation executing means is configured to display the predetermined display more than when the specific presentation is performed before the change presentation is performed. Change the display mode of (for example, when the notice effect in the meter change notification mode is executed before the meter effect in the super reach effect is performed, the meter effect in the meter effect in the super reach effect is performed If the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is not executed before changing the 3 levels or 4 levels and performing the meter effect in the super reach effect, the meter in the meter effect in the super reach effect is not executed. It is characterized in that only one or two levels are changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the expectation for the specific effect to be performed.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect in any one of a plurality of types of execution periods (for example, a meter change) As the advance notice effect in the notification mode, when the amount of change in the meter during the super reach effect is 4 levels, the advance effect of 8 seconds is executed, and the change amount of the meter in the effect of super reach effect is In the case of three levels, it is characterized in that a four-second advance notice effect etc. is executed). According to such a configuration, the interest of the specific effect can be improved.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), a suggestion effect executing means (for example, in a meter change notification mode) capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating whether or not the specific effect is executed The present invention is further characterized in that it further comprises an effect control CPU 90120 or the like that can execute an audition effect that warms up whether or not the advance notice effect is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to raise the player's sense of expectation for the specific effect to be executed.

  (5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4), a special effect executing means (for example, a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect corresponding to the display mode of the predetermined display changing to a specific stage. According to the display mode of the meter MT being changed to MAX, the CPU further includes an effect control CPU 90120 or the like capable of executing special mode super reach effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the display mode of the predetermined display to change up to the specific stage.

  (6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), an adjustment image display means capable of displaying an adjustment image for adjusting a rendering effect (for example, when the volume is adjusted, the adjustment result of the volume The effect image control CPU 90120 or the like for displaying the adjustment result image indicating the image in a mode in which it is superimposed on the effect image or the demo image in the predetermined area of the image display device 905) It is characterized in that the adjusted image is made invisible or hard to recognize in response to being derived (for example, deleting the adjustment result image R in the derivation display period T2 of the variable display result). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the visibility of the variable display result.

  (Modification 1) In the above, the display mode of the meter is set to five levels of level 0 to level 4. However, the display mode of the meter is not limited to five stages. For example, the display mode of the meter may be set to four or less or six or more.

  (Modification 2) In the above, the timing at which the display mode of the meter is changed corresponds to the content set in the process of step S90403, and changes at high speed based on the effect control pattern selected in the process of step S90406. We changed the display mode of the meter so that it was in middle and super reach production. However, for example, it is changed to any level at a predetermined timing such as the start timing of variable display, the start timing of preview effect, the timing when a character image is displayed, and the timing when variable display effect of “pseudo series” is executed. The display mode of the meter may be changed by determining whether or how many steps are to be changed. In addition, when a notice effect, a display of a character image, and the like are performed multiple times during one variable display, each time a notice effect, a display of a character image, or a notice effect, a display of a character image, etc. is executed. The display mode of the meter may be changed. Further, in the case where the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed a plurality of times in the variable display effect of “pseudo chain”, the display mode of the meter may be changed at each timing when the pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed.

  (Modification 3) In the above, the meter effect is executed in the variable display in which the special aspect super reach effect is executed to change the display mode of the meter. However, for example, the meter effect may be performed in the variable display performed before the variable display in which the special aspect super reach effect is performed. Specifically, the variable display capable of executing the special aspect super reach effect may be the variable display of the notice object, and the meter effect may be executed over a plurality of variable displays performed before the variable display of the notice object, or The meter effect may be performed in the variable display performed immediately before the variable display of the advance target. When the meter effect is performed over a plurality of variable displays, the display mode of the meter may be changed one by one each time the variable display is performed, or every time the variable display is performed, the meter The step of changing the display mode may be determined, and the display mode of the meter may be changed based on the determination result.

  In addition, when the display mode of the meter is randomly changed over a plurality of variable displays up to level 3, and the variable display in which the special mode super reach effect is performed is started, the special mode super reach effect is performed. In the variable display, the display mode of the meter may be changed to the display mode of MAX by taking advantage of the special mode super reach effect.

  (Modification 4) In the above, in step S90504, the high-speed fluctuation middle arrival level of the meter is determined by lottery. However, the high-speed middle arrival level of the meter is not limited to the one by lottery. For example, one high-speed fluctuation medium arrival level may be set in advance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Also, a plurality of high-speed fluctuation medium arrival levels may be set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, it may be determined by lottery which one of the plurality of high-speed change middle reach levels. In addition, the high-speed change middle reach level of the meter may be determined based on the type of the preview effect to be executed, the execution time, and the like.

  (Modification 5) In the above embodiment, when executing the meter effect which becomes a squeeze, the final reaching level of the meter is determined by drawing in step S90507, and the high speed fluctuation middle reaching level of the meter is drawn in step S90508. Determined by However, the determination of the final arrival level of the meter and the high-speed fluctuation middle arrival level is not limited to the lottery. For example, one final arrival level or a high-speed fluctuation middle arrival level may be set in advance corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In addition, a plurality of final arrival levels or high-speed variation middle arrival levels may be set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this case, one of a plurality of final arrival levels and a high-speed variation middle arrival level may be determined by lottery. In addition, the final arrival level of the meter or the high-speed fluctuation middle arrival level may be determined based on the type of the preview effect to be executed, the execution time, and the like. In the case of executing a meter effect which becomes a gap, it is preferable not to change the display mode of the meter to the display mode of MAX.

  (Modification 6) In the above-described embodiment, the special mode super reach effect starts in advance at a timing 44 seconds after the start of variable display, and the execution timing of the special mode super reach effect is determined in advance. Oita. However, the execution timing of the special aspect super reach effect is not limited to a predetermined one. For example, the execution timing of the special aspect super reach effect may be determined by drawing from among a plurality of execution timings.

  (Modification 7) In the above embodiment, the special aspect super reach effect is an aspect such that the expectation for the variable display result to be a "big hit" can be enhanced, and the special aspect super reach effect can be executed. The normal mode super reach effect performed in the period equivalent to the above was such an aspect that the expectation for the variable display result to be a "big hit" can not be heightened so much. However, the effect aspect of the special aspect super reach effect or the effect aspect of the normal aspect super reach effect performed in a period corresponding to a period in which the special aspect super reach effect can be performed is not limited to the above aspect. For example, the special aspect super reach production is a production aspect that plays the big hit that can be obtained a lot of balls, and the special aspect super reach production that is executed in a period equivalent to a possible execution period of the special aspect super reach production It is good also as a production | presentation aspect which sings a big hit and a small hit which can not obtain a popping ball in fact. And a ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state from which a ball is obtained after special mode super reach production is performed is made into 60%, for example, and a normal mode is a period equivalent to a period which can perform special mode super reach production. The big hit expectation when the special aspect super reach production is performed, for example, the percentage controlled to the big hit gaming state where the balls are not obtained after the super reach production is executed is 40%, etc., special A high and low may be added to the jackpot expectation degree when the normal mode super reach presentation is performed in a period corresponding to a period in which the aspect super reach presentation can be performed.

  (Modification 8) In the above embodiment, the notice effect of the effect mode other than the meter change notification mode is an effect notifying that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit gaming state. However, the notice effects of the effect modes other than the meter change notification mode are not limited to the effects of notifying that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit gaming state. For example, the notice effect of the effect mode other than the meter change notification mode may be an effect notifying that there is a possibility of becoming a game state such as a probability change state after the variable display result becomes a "big hit". In this case, for example, a probability variation determination device may be provided. The probability variation determination device includes, for example, an area that changes to an entry easy state in which the game ball easily enters and a entry difficult state in which the game ball hardly enters. The said area | region of a probability variation determination apparatus should just be changed into the entry easy state in the round game of a big hit game state, for example. The game ball which has passed the area enters inside the probability variation determination device. In addition, the probability variation determination device is internally provided with a specific area to which the game ball having passed through the area can enter. The award balls may be paid out based on the game ball having entered at least one of the winning opening, the specific area, and the non-specific area. In such a pachinko gaming machine, for example, when the gaming ball having passed through the winning opening enters a specific area, it becomes a definite change state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, at the start of the variable display, instead of the big hit type, an aspect in which the area is changed to the entry easy state is determined from among the plurality of types. Since the time for making the entry easy state differs according to the determined aspect, the possibility of whether or not the positive change state occurs after that changes depending on the determined aspect.

  (Modification 9) In the above embodiment, the meter is displayed in a predetermined manner. However, the predetermined display is not limited to the meter. The predetermined display may be, for example, an item, a character, a numeral or the like. When the predetermined display is an item, for example, the type or number of items may be changed. When the predetermined display is a character, for example, the size, color, number of people, etc. of the character may be changed. When the predetermined display is a number, for example, the number may be increased or decreased. Such a predetermined display may be used to perform an effect instead of the meter effect. That is, the predetermined display is, for example, that the value of the meter changes stepwise to finally become a specific value, that the kind of item changes stepwise to become a specific kind, the number of items is graded Changing to a specific number, changing the size of the character stepwise to a specific size, changing the color of the character stepwise to a specific color, the number of characters It is sufficient if it can change stepwise to a specific stage, such as changing to a specific number of people changing stepwise to become a specific number changing to a specific number. Then, changing in steps means, for example, that the value of the meter increases or decreases, that the type of item changes to any one of a plurality of preset types, the number of items increases, or decreases The predetermined display such as increasing or decreasing the size, changing the color of the character to any of a plurality of preset types, changing the number of characters, increasing or decreasing the number, etc. It does not always change to a specific stage, and a predetermined display changes to a specific stage (for example, if the stage at the start of the change is level 0 and the specific stage is level 4, the level goes up) Change to a phase opposite to a specific phase (eg, if the phase at the start of the change is level 0 and the specific phase is level 4, ) Or it may be repeated.

  (Modification 10) In the above embodiment, the meter MT is always displayed as a predetermined display regardless of whether the meter effect is being executed. However, the meter MT as the predetermined display may be displayed only when the meter effect is performed. In that case, although the meter effect is not executed, the meter MT as a predetermined display may be displayed. By adopting such an aspect, if the meter MT is displayed as the predetermined display, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation for the meter effect to be executed.

  (Modification 11) In the above embodiment, the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode is performed only immediately before the meter effect during the super reach effect. However, the advance notice effect in the meter change notification mode may be performed immediately before the effect period of the meter effect that may be executed at another timing, such as the meter effect during high speed fluctuation. By adopting such an aspect, it is possible to enhance the player's expectation for the meter effect to be executed at various timings.

  (Modification 12) In the above embodiment, regardless of whether the variation pattern is the variation pattern for which the super reach effect of the super A is executed or the variation pattern for which the super reach effect of the super B is executed, the super reach If it is a fluctuation pattern in which the effect is executed, the effect control CPU 90120 secures the effect time of the special mode super reach effect and makes it possible to execute. However, in the ROM 90101 included in the game control microcomputer 90100, different variation patterns are prepared depending on whether or not to execute the special aspect super reach effect, or the effect time in executing the special aspect super reach effect, The effect control CPU 90120 is based on the specified effect time only in the case of the change pattern in which the execution of the special mode super reach effect is specified according to the change pattern specification command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100. The special aspect super reach effect may be executed to become. By setting it as such an aspect, it omits the processing for determining the production time etc. in the case of performing special aspect super reach production whether special aspect super reach production is performed by CPU90120 for production control, etc. And the processing load can be suppressed.

  (Modification 13) In the above embodiment, when the display mode of the meter changes to MAX in the meter effect, the special aspect super reach effect is always executed. However, even if the display mode of the meter changes up to MAX in the meter effect, the special aspect super reach effect may not be executed. In that case, even if the display mode of the meter changes to MAX in the meter effect, the special mode super reach effect is not executed, for example, determined at a sufficiently small ratio only when the variable display result is "big hit" It may be possible to By setting it as such an aspect, even if the display mode of the meter changes to MAX in the meter effect, when the special aspect super reach effect is not executed, the variable display result becomes "big hit" and the big hit gaming state is controlled. It can be announced that it will be

  (Modification 14) In the above embodiment, when variable display is started in order to notify the CPU 90120 for variable pattern indicating variable display time of the decorative symbol and variable display mode such as the type of reach effect 1 Although an example of transmitting one variation pattern specification command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the CPU for effect control 90120 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, in the game control microcomputer 90100, as the first command, the variable before the reach is reached, such as presence or absence of variable display effects such as "slip" and "simulated link" A command indicating the display time and the variable display mode is transmitted, and as the second command, a command indicating the variable display time and the variable display mode after reaching the reach, such as the reach type and the presence / absence of relottery effect, is transmitted. You may do so. In this case, the effect control CPU 90120 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the variable display time derived from the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90100 notifies the variable display time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 90120 selects a specific variable display mode to be executed at each timing. You may When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or after sending the first command, send the second command after a predetermined time has elapsed. You may do it. In addition, the variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored and prepared in advance as a fluctuation pattern designation command.

  (Modification 15) The present invention is applicable not only to the pachinko gaming machine 901 but also to slot machines and the like. The slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine that plays a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols serving as multiple types of identification information, for example, and can give a predetermined gaming value based on the game result, and more specifically, The game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game, and the display result of the variable display device that variably displays a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified can be derived and displayed. It is a gaming machine in which one game is completed, and a prize can be generated according to the display result. In such a slot machine, hardware resources including an image display device of the slot machine cooperate with software for performing predetermined processing to provide all or part of the features of the pachinko gaming machine 901. It should just be comprised.

  The slot machines are not limited to those in which the number of bets is set using medals and credits as gaming values, but only slot machines that set the number of bets using gaming balls as gaming values and only credits as gaming values It may be a fully credited slot machine that sets the number of bets using. When using a game ball as a game medium, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls, for example, when setting 3 as the number of bets, the number of bets is made using 15 game balls. Is equivalent to setting. The pachinko gaming machine 901 and the slot machine are not limited to those using only one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, and for example, a plurality of types of medals and gaming balls etc. The game value may be used in combination. For example, a slot machine can set a bet number and play a game using any of a plurality of game values such as medals and game balls, and a medal or game ball etc. when a prize is generated. Any of a plurality of types of gaming values may be paid out.

  As the effects that can be executed in such a slot machine, it is only necessary to include advance notice effects or meter effects in the meter change notification mode.

  (Modification 16) In addition, the apparatus configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the process shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display apparatus for executing predetermined effects such as advance notice effects, and the sound output operation in speakers The various effects such as the game effect lamp and the lighting operation of the decorative LED can be arbitrarily changed and corrected without departing from the scope of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, and it is based on the occurrence of a winning ball by enclosing a gaming ball. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type gaming machine that gives a score.

  (Modification 17) The program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed and provided by a removable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine 901 or a slot machine, for example. The present invention is not limited to the form, and it may be distributed by being preinstalled in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  (Modification 18) Also, the execution form of the game is not limited to one executed by attaching a removable recording medium, and temporarily stores the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be possible to execute directly by using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

  (Modification 19) In the above, “the proportions are different” is not limited to the ones having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% and A: B = 30%: 70%, but It is a concept that also includes different proportions such as B: 100%: 0%.

  (Modification 20) In the above embodiment, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols and decorative symbols of "1" to "8" and deriving and displaying the display result is shown, but such variable display is It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived need not necessarily be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  (Modification 21) In the above embodiment, the random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of each random number or changing the update range of each random number.

  (Modification 22) In the above embodiment, the main substrate 9011 stores a table for determination of random numbers, and the main substrate 9011 determines the random values based on the random values extracted from the main substrate 9011 at the start winning. The table is referred to, the determination process of the random number value is executed, and the effect control substrate 9012 receives the determination result determined in the main substrate 9011 and shows an example of executing the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the received determination result. However, the mode of execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the effect control board 9012 stores the determination table for the random number, and the effect control board 9012 receives the random number itself extracted from the main board 9011 from the main board 9011, and based on the received random value The random number value determination process may be executed with reference to the random number value determination table, and the prefetching notice effect may be performed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the determination process of the random number value may be performed in the effect control board 9012. Further, the determination process of the random value may be performed on both of the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of random number values and execute the process of determining the random number value, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives a random number value and performs determination of whether or not to be a big hit, and when it is a big hit, performs determination of the type of big hit, and based on the random value, the main board 9011 The determination result of the variation pattern type determined in step S may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the advance notice / notification effect based on the judgment result judged by itself and the judgment result judged by the main board 9011.

  (Modification 23) In the above embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main substrate 9011 is generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 9011 is turned on. It explained as a thing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an interrupt request for receiving the effect control command may be generated in response to an interrupt request due to the first bit of serial communication.

  It should be understood that the form disclosed herein is illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 9 effect display device 100 microcomputer 560 for effect control Microcomputer AH for game control Active display 901 Pachinko gaming machine 90120 CPU for effect control
9060 Movable effect member MT meter 9055 chance character image R adjustment result image

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display and controlling it to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Predetermined display means capable of displaying a predetermined display corresponding to the variable display;
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect of changing the display mode of the predetermined display by causing the operation display to act;
At least indication means for indicating indication that can indicate an expectation that is advantageous to the player by changing the display mode in a plurality of steps, and that can be executed at least during the change indication;
A change production executing means capable of executing a change production capable of changing the display mode of the indication display;
Suggestion display control that can execute display control to redisplay according to the execution of the change presentation after the indication display being executed during the fluctuation display is once erased with the start of the execution of the special presentation as a trigger Equipped with
The specific effect execution means is
The display of the action display is started, and the first pattern for changing the display mode of the predetermined display after a predetermined period has started, and the display of the action display is started, and the display mode of the predetermined display is not changed after the predetermined period has elapsed It is possible to execute 2 patterns,
After the display of the action display is started, the speed of the action display on the target predetermined display can be reduced and displayed at a common timing in the predetermined period of the first pattern and the second pattern. Gaming machine.